JP6622673B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  In Patent Document 1, for example, a predetermined notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identification information at the start of variable display of the identification information (in Patent Document 1, as shown in FIG. A gaming machine capable of executing a blackout effect such as a blackout effect that displays a dark image 83 on the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display form of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c (in Patent Document 1) A pachinko machine 1) is disclosed.

JP 2006-122265 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the movement of the identification information becomes difficult to understand due to a predetermined notice effect that makes the display mode of the identification information difficult to view, and the interest of the game cannot be improved. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand and can improve the interest of the game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the invention according to claim 1 is:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (for example, decorative designs) in a predetermined direction;
Notice effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, a full screen notice effect);
Control means (for example, a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), a solenoid, a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, a fourth lamp unit 90204, a fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP90123A, dedicated IC, etc.)
Based on the input of the control signal outputted from the control means, said output means for outputting a driving signal for driving the electronic components (e.g., a serial-parallel conversion IC9091B~9095B etc.) provided with a,
The output means receives a control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 49), and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T in FIG. 49) has elapsed (FIG. 49: timeout). Function)
The stopping means can be set to valid or invalid,
In the case where the stop means is valid and outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses. (For example, until a predetermined period T elapses from time t1), the control signal is output again ,
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information is not visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize at the start of the variable display (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the processes of steps S322A and S344A. 27 (B2), a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 29 (B2) or FIG.
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can start variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the process of step S322A is executed). After the elapse of the blackout effect execution period shown in FIG. 27 (B2), FIG. 29 (B2), or FIG. 31 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 performs FIG. 27 (D2), (E2), and FIG. 29 (D). , (E) or the forward variation of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 31 (D2)),
A specific effect can be executed in a display area common to the predetermined notice effect,
The specific effect can be executed at a first timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
The specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed.
A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
Adjusting means capable of adjusting the effect of the effect according to the adjusting operation by the player;
Adjustment image display means for displaying an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period;
When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment image not visible or difficult to view during the period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the malfunction of an electronic component can be avoided, an electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The predetermined direction may be a normal direction (for example, a forward direction of a decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 27D1, 27D2, E1, and E2).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The predetermined notice effect is an effect suggesting an expectation degree to be in an advantageous state, and is an effect executed in a state of hiding a part or the whole of the identification information (for example, the full screen notice effect is shown in FIG. As shown in B), in the case of a big hit, it is easier to display than in the case of losing, and an effect of hiding the entire decorative design (see FIG. 27 (B2)) may be used.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The variable display means can variably display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, the reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction (for example, for effect control for executing the processes of steps S322C and S345B). The decorative pattern may be variably displayed in the reverse direction different from the forward direction as shown in FIG. 27 (B1) and FIG. 29 (B1) by the CPU 120).

  According to such a configuration, the direction of variable display becomes diversified, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The variable display means variably displays the identification information in the specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, at least a full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 26B and FIG. 33). In the execution period, the decorative symbols may be variably displayed in the reverse direction).

  According to such a configuration, after the identification information is variably displayed in a specific direction, it can be variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
An identification information advance notice can be executed at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (for example, as shown in FIGS. 27B1 and 31B1 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322B and S345). In addition, the symbol notice effect can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the identification information notice.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
When the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect are executed, the identification information notice is executed after the predetermined notice effect ends (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step S322D, FIG. C2), after completion of the full screen notice effect shown in FIG. 31 (C2), the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 27 (D2) and FIG. 31 (D2) may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information advance notice and the predetermined advance notice effect from being executed at the same time, and the identification information advance notice is not visible or difficult to see due to the predetermined advance notice effect. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
At least during the execution of variable display, adjustment means that can adjust the effect according to the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S706 and S707),
Adjustment image display means (for example, steps S708 and S703) for displaying an adjustment image (for example, the adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 32B to 32D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T1). Production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S704),
When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjusted image display means displays the adjusted image in a period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed (for example, the derived display period T2). Not visible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S710 to S712) or difficult to view (for example, the adjustment image is displayed semi-transparently or blinked).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above,
At least a part of the display area of the adjustment image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 17A).

  According to such a configuration, the adjustment image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, so that a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result can be suppressed.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) or (9) above,
The error image may not be deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 17 (D2)).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(11) In any of the gaming machines (8) to (10) above,
The display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjusted image (for example, in step S57, until the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the abnormality notification command eliminates the error indicated by the command, FIG. 17D1). , (D2) may continue to be displayed).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (8) to (11) above,
When the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is kept visible (for example, see FIG. 17B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is erased (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) For example, the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662 may be executed).

  According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

(13) In any of the gaming machines (8) to (12) above,
A determination means (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step S239) for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state);
Display means for variably displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination result of the determination means and deriving and displaying the variable display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of steps S325, S348, and S350);
A specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the change effect character display process in step S162) capable of displaying a specific effect image during the variable display of the identification information;
The specific effect image can be disposed at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 15B),
The specific effect execution means sets the display mode of the specific effect image as a static mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information during a period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived (for example, effect control) The CPU 120 may execute the process of step S609).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means 14 to 21. Conventionally, as a motor provided in a gaming machine, there is a motor that uses a stepping motor having a plurality of exciting coils to which voltage pulses are individually supplied. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104147, a voltage pulse signal is individually supplied to each excitation coil of a stepping motor according to a control signal for controlling the operation of the stepping motor, and the voltage pulse signal is supplied to each excitation coil. In addition, there is shown one in which an abnormal operation of a stepping motor is determined based on a feedback signal that is input in parallel and is a single signal corresponding to the input state of each voltage pulse signal input in parallel. However, in the motor provided in this gaming machine, when the control signal for controlling the operation of the electronic component such as the stepping motor is unintentionally interrupted, the operation of the electronic component may become unstable. is there. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can operate electronic components provided in the gaming machine more stably.

(14) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Control means (for example, a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), a solenoid, a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, a fourth lamp unit 90204, a fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP90123A, dedicated IC, etc.)
Output means for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B),
The output means receives a control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 49), and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T in FIG. 49) has elapsed (FIG. 49: timeout). Function)
When the control means outputs a control signal and continuously drives the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). The control signal is output until the predetermined period T elapses.

  According to such a configuration, an operation failure of the electronic component can be avoided, so that the electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above,
The output means includes conversion means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B) that converts a serial signal type control signal output from the control means into a parallel signal type drive signal.

  According to such a configuration, the number of communication wires between the control unit and the output unit can be reduced.

(16) In the gaming machine of (14) or (15) above,
It further includes setting means (a predetermined terminal for setting the time-out function of each conversion IC to be valid or invalid, an effect control board 9012, etc.) for setting the stop means valid or invalid.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the function of the stop unit to be valid or invalid according to the application, and thus it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

(17) In the gaming machine of any one of (14) to (16) above,
A first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012) provided with the control means;
A second substrate (for example, the first lamp substrate 90210) provided with the output means,
The first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected via a wiring member (flexible, harness, etc.).

  According to such a structure, since it is arrange | positioned on another board | substrate, it can suppress that the control abnormality which may generate | occur | produce by the malfunction (disconnection, short circuit, etc.) of wiring generate | occur | produces.

(18) In any one of the above gaming machines (14) to (17),
The output means controls the driving of the electronic component by outputting a PWM signal as a driving signal (for example, the driving signal is PWM-controlled by the number of Low signals, and the light emission luminance of each LED is light emission by PWM control) The gradation is controlled according to the period.)

  According to such a configuration, power efficiency can be increased by PWM control.

(19) In any one of the above gaming machines (14) to (18),
The output means includes
The output state when the input control signal is output to other output means includes a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state with a normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51A), The output state can be set to any one of a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51B) in which the waveform rises in a modest change than the first output state,
When the other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means, the second output state is set (for example, connected in the substrate like the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B). The conversion IC 9092B is set to output a low slew rate waveform).

  According to such a configuration, since the output state when outputting within the same substrate is set to the second output state, radiation of noise to the outside of the substrate can be suppressed.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any of (14) to (19) above,
The output means includes
The output state when the input control signal is output to other output means includes a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state with a normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51A), The output state can be set to any one of a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51B) in which the waveform rises in a modest change than the first output state,
When the other output means is provided on another board connected via the wiring member to the board on which the output means is provided, the first output state is set (for example, serial (If the parallel conversion IC 9094B and serial / parallel conversion IC 9095B are connected outside the substrate, the conversion IC 9094B is set to output a normal slew rate waveform).

  According to such a configuration, since the output state when outputting to another substrate connected via the wiring member is set to the first output state, the influence of noise from the outside on the control signal is suppressed. Can do.

(21) In any one of the above gaming machines (14) to (20),
It further includes a movable member (for example, a production unit 90300) that performs an operation,
The output means outputs a specific signal by a parallel communication system from specific signal output units (for example, terminals Q0 to 23 corresponding to groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 54) grouped into a plurality of different groups,
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, the periods of the PWM clock signals of groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 54 are shifted by 1 MHz).
The driving means for operating the movable member (for example, the motor of the driving mechanism 90201) is the specific signal output unit (for example, terminals of the group belonging to the same period (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) in the same group of the output means). ) Is driven on the basis of a specific signal output from).

  According to such a configuration, noise emission to the outside of the substrate can be suppressed by shifting the output period of the specific signal by the parallel communication method.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character display process for a change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an adjustment result image. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a full screen notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a full screen notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a symbol notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure showing a decision example of a symbol notice effect, and (C) is a figure showing a decision example of a type of a symbol notice effect. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol reverse direction start display setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a symbol reverse direction start display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of the decoration design of modification 1, each notice effect, etc. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the design reverse direction start display setting process of the modification 2, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the classification of the design reverse start display of the modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of the decoration pattern of the modification 3, each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of execution production of the modification 3. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows examples, such as various control boards mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example etc. of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a front view showing an effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. (A) is a front view which shows the state which has a movable part in a tilting position, and (B) shows the state which has a movable part in a standing position. It is a figure which shows the flow of drive control and light emission control. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is a figure which shows the further another example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is an image figure of the output waveform of a control signal. It is a figure which shows the modification of the connection of conversion IC. It is a figure of the circuit structural example of a 2nd lamp drive part and a 2nd lamp part. It is a figure for demonstrating the phase separation of the drive signal which serial-parallel conversion outputs. It is a figure of the circuit structural example of an accessory drive part and a drive mechanism. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows an on-hold selection time production pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the said display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows a change production pattern table. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a hold display in an effect display device. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display of the active display after displaying a character icon as a hold display in an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an icon production setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which selects the execution timing of the display mode change effect during hold display from several timings. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a battle reach effect is performed. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a story reach effect is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production and movable body production in a specific super reach production.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, a portion described as “Step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. Different types of symbol numbers, such as any one of “1” to “9”, need only be attached to a plurality of types of ornament symbols variably displayed in each ornament symbol display area. Such variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that the variable display of various display symbols, such as special symbols and decorative symbols, is synchronized, the variable display starts and ends at the same timing (same or approximate), and the variable display period is the same. (Same or approximate). The effect image indicating the decorative design is also referred to as an identification information image. Therefore, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol serving as the identification information image is performed. Is performed, and an effect image indicating the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result is derived.

  For example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a decorative symbol display state is also called a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, and although the display result in the variable decorative symbol display is not definitely displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol due to scroll display or update display proceeds. The player can recognize that it is not. Note that the temporary stop display of the decorative design may include displaying the decorative design completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. .

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HR and a second hold display unit 5HL are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HR displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HL displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game has not yet been established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). If the first special figure reservation storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first start winning is based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed.

  In the first hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value “4” of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR, the hold on the first hold display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR, a new first hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HR, when a special game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HR While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A that has not yet started.

  The second hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved storage number, and the reserved numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the right end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL, the second hold display part 5HL holds it. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, a new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HL, and when the special figure game using the second special view is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HL While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area. In this way, the second hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B that has not yet started.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL, or instead of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  In the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 5V which is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of “left”, “middle” and “right”. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. The effect image indicating the small symbol is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the small symbol serving as the notification information image is performed, and the effect image indicating the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result is displayed. Derived.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols different from the decorative symbols is performed. During the period from the start of the decorative display of the decorative design to the time when the final decorative design that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small design is continuously performed in a certain display mode and disappears from the screen or is blocked. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V are always referred to as small symbols or effect small symbols. In the small symbol display area 5V, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is a part of or all of a plurality of decorative symbols, such as a symbol indicating a number in the same manner as a portion indicating a number in a decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbols may be variably displayed as the notification information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is not displayed. The variable display of the small symbols may be difficult to view or impossible to view during the execution period of the full screen notice effect described later.

  In addition, a 4th symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and further the normal symbol, and the variable display of the 4th symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed and not displayed at a certain time interval in a specific display color (for example, blue) in the fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5 or outside the screen. This is realized by continuing display control that repeats. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the 4th symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at positions separated from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It has been. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 has difficulty in confirming the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable symbol variable display proceeds. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not a display result has been derived. In contrast, by performing variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is referred to as a “normal game” (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general figure holding display 25C for displaying the number of common figure holdings stored as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate switch 21 of FIG.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. The main board 11 controls turning on and off of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling variable display or controlling normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling on / off and color development of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs a display operation on the image display device 5, an operation for turning on or off all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. A function of determining control contents for causing the electrical parts for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as all or a part, is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, etc. A lamp driver circuit for supplying a drive current for turning on and off the LED is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. The effect control command also includes an abnormal winning notification command for instructing abnormality notification. When the abnormality notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, an error notification process (S57) is executed under the control of the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 12). Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 stores the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 sends the input of various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the receiving control CPU 120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect controlling CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device as an effect electrical component included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on various information transmitted from the main board 11 as an effect control command.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. To be controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  In the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, the display control data indicates the display mode of various images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. More specifically, the display control data includes various patterns such as a background, a decorative pattern, and a small pattern that configure each frame (an image that is a unit that is switched and displayed at a frame period) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is only necessary to include data specifying the type, position, size, etc. of the effect image indicating the character, etc., data specifying the display order (priority) when a plurality of effect images are displayed in a superimposed manner. The data indicating the display order (priority) of the effect images may be data indicating which effect image among the plurality of effect images is to be arranged on the front side when viewed from the player.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configured image data memory may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the audio control board 13 (sound effect signal), and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (electrical signal) Etc.) is output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is moved by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In the normal game, after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, it is predetermined on the screen of the image display device 5. A finalized decorative symbol that is the winning combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a combination of big hits is determined by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols all together on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is set by the big winning door). The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is a second round number (eg, “2”) that is less than the first round number (eg, “15”), which is the number of execution times of the normal open round. ). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is performed. The period to be changed becomes at least one of the second period shorter than the first period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number. That's fine.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a prize winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is the jackpot gaming state (first specified game state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. The gaming state is more disadvantageous for the player than the gaming state. Thus, when the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed based on the fact that the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprising”, the special change is made in the second change mode in which the gaming ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or a big hit gaming state is started before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probable change state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, the decorative symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) is stopped in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to rocking, scaling, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative design, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation modes before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, a plurality of pre-set chances for a pseudo combination of special combinations are displayed. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed in accordance with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect Controls may be made so that the number of which is lit is increased one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside the game area during each change display (including the initial change) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (including the initial change) The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the operation mode of the production model (movable member) may be controlled to change, or among the plurality of production models (movable member). It may be controlled so that what is operated in changes.

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect in which some or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-variation effect is performed multiple times, rather than a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that a predetermined game value is given such as the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) may be increased.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions (pseudo-continuous times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) than when the number of pseudo-continuous times is small. Get higher. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation (number of pseudo continuous runs). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols are displayed. And / or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are changed again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Further, the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has reached the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display subject to notice is started is “single notice effect” (“single notice”, “variable notice” or “variable notice in advance”. It is also called “Direction”).

  In this embodiment, as an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL are displayed as normal display modes. By changing to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, blue, etc.) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) in a normal time is used as a display color in a display part that displays the number of special figure reservations to be specified. By so doing, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display is set to a specific pattern (for example, cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal time, so that the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by displaying a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual ( Suggest) Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  The pre-reading notice effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize has occurred, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. Anything is acceptable. For example, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). Anything may be executed (started) before. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect that predicts that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least as much as the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything may be executed (started) before.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes among the hold display change effects is also called a hold display change success effect. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change among the hold display change effects is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change common effect includes the hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. The reserved display change common effect is, for example, by displaying on the screen of the image display device 5 an effect image showing a character (change effect character: for example, character CH1 shown in FIG. It is only necessary to include an action effect that acts on the hold display corresponding to the variable display.

  The effect image showing the character CH1 in the reserved display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. Note that a promotion display image P shown in FIG. 32C to be described later is also an example of the specific effect image. The effect image indicating the character CH1 may be continuously displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. The effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the specific effect image only needs to be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as viewed from the player rather than at least a part of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image. In this case, in the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 that is the specific effect image is displayed at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol. Let it be a stationary mode.

  The action effect in the hold display change common effect is applied to either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests the possibility of a change may be used. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a part or all of the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are lit in a predetermined lighting mode, The movable member may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. Thus, after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action changes is also called the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. As described above, the effect in which the action display in the hold display change common effect is executed but the display mode of the hold display in which the effect is exerted does not change is also referred to as a hold change change effect as the first failure effect.

  The effect of changing the display color of the hold display is also referred to as a display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) is also referred to as a special display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal reach” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The random value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result indicates that the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is closed (normally open) with the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game as “per figure”. This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state (expanded open state) in which game balls are likely to pass (enter) more frequently than (state).

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) in the normal symbol display 20 to change the normal symbol variable display, the tilting operation setting of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control associated with the time-shortening control, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (ordinary symbol variation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” than in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” A part or all of the control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in 6B longer than that in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of S110 to S117 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Execute.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not (4)) (S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 Is set to "1" (S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in S201 (S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the normally variable winning ball apparatus Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not “4”) (S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of second special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in S205 (S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (S206).

  After either of the processes of S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Also, the second reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated by 1 and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated by 1. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (S208).

  After executing the process of S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (S209). As an example, in the process of S209, a random number value for determining a special figure display result from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numeric data indicating the random number MR2 for determining MR1, the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numeric data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (S210).

  In the processing of S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data Is set in the second special figure storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit is a special game (not yet started), although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first start winning is generated. The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored as a hold memory. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. (Special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a super-reach reach production or the like. As described above, the first special figure holding storage unit has established the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not yet started. The storage information of the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 4A is stored.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach. As described above, the second special figure holding storage unit has established the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not yet started. The storage information of the special figure game on the second special symbol display device 4B is stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S210, settings for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 are performed (S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (S212). Thereafter, a setting for transmitting a reserved memory count notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S215), and then the start winning determination process. Exit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S216), and then the processing of S204 is performed. Proceed to processing. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S212 of FIG. 4 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is set to “big hit” in the special symbol normal processing (S110 of FIG. 3, FIG. 8) described later to enter the big hit gaming state. Determination of whether to control, determination of fluctuation pattern, etc. are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is determined whether or not the random symbol value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 is determined to be the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. Judgment is made whether or not there is. As a result, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” before the variable symbol special symbol display or decorative symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start prize opening is started. Whether to reach a reach state during variable display of symbols, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute a notice effect as a pre-read effect by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side or not Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time reduction flag or a probability change flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state. It only needs to be identified.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (S402). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base is being operated in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (S403). When it is determined in S402 that the jackpot is being hit (S402; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is being set in S403 (S403; Yes), whether or not the start port buffer value is “2”. Is determined (S404).

  When it is determined in S403 that the vehicle is not in the high base (S403; No), or when it is determined in S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (S404; Yes), it is shown in FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random value extracted in the process of S209. In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (special figure display result determination table data) ) Is selected. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the decision value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, when it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. Regardless of the number of special figure hold memory, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing can be determined as a random pattern that can be determined as a variation pattern with a reach effect including super reach or normal reach (disturbance for determining the variation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 are prepared in advance. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of a plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) and FIG. 11 (B2), assignment of determination values to a plurality of variation patterns is performed. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure hold memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 6 shows a determination example of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determined values are assigned to the variation patterns as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is used. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic change state with a time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with the normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number) when the start winning is generated coincides with the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, there may be a change due to execution of variable display or generation of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. For this reason, there is a case where the table data selected due to the difference in the number of special figure hold memory does not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` losing '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memory at the time of starting winning in the pachinko machine 1 or at the start of variable display, and reach effect including normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined as a variation pattern involving

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “determined reach when lost”. judge. If the variable display result is “lost” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, the variable display content is determined if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”. Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the starting port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (S404; No), a setting for limiting the winning determination in the process of S405 is performed (S406). ). Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening. Restrict the variable display contents from being judged. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of starting winning according to the determination result by the process of S405 and the setting by the process of S406 are set (S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S408), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 7 shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command and second reserved memory number notification command), An example of setting a winning determination result command is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as the reserved memory number notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory number notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory number notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure reserved memory count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) is generated, S202 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the first special figure reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value in the process, the first start condition is established. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of S203 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a first start opening winning designation command is transmitted. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  FIG. 4 shows a case where a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) is generated. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of S206 shown in FIG. 4 and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of S211 so that the main board 11 changes to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a second start opening winning designation command is transmitted. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the first starting prize is detected when a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first starting prize opening or when the gaming ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the determination result at the time of winning) using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is given to the effect control board 12 side. To notify. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the game ball passes (enters) through either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Notifying whether it occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending memory number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number may be used.

  FIG. 7B exemplifies the contents of notification by a winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the command C402H, the command C403H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the big hit determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. The determination result (variable display content is “big hit”) is notified. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content) that the variation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of losing. Will notify you of “Super reach when lost”. The command C403H is transmitted when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss, and the winning determination result (variable display content is determined to be a variation pattern with a reach effect at the time of loss. “Reach when lost”). The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or the reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notification of the determination result (variable display content is “general when lost”). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol storage unit or the second special symbol storage unit. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing a setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is a variable symbol display result. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed as an effect control command that can specify that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “2” or “15” depending on the type of jackpot) And a process of waiting until the next round game is started when the upper limit number has not been reached. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. To be updated.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability changing state or the short time state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S231). The second special figure holding memory number is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S231 (S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numeric data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as pending data (S232). Thereby, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second starting winning) at the second starting winning opening in the process of S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the second special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory unit is updated. The stored contents are shifted (S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of S233, the total number of pending storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure hold memory number is “0”, and whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is “0”. Determine whether. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed (entered) the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start prize opening or the second start prize opening is associated with the hold number or separately from the hold data, and is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 And the order in which the start conditions are established can be specified for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Following the processing of S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory unit is updated. The stored content is shifted (S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of S237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (S238).

  After executing one of the processes of S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (S239). As an example, in the process of S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the fluctuation random number buffer. When the special symbol display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of S239, the special symbol display result derived in the special symbol game becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol variable display After the display result derived in the above becomes a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. As described above, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by executing the process of S239.

  In the process of S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time-short state. The result is determined as “big hit”. The probability variation state is started when the probability variation flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability variation” or “surprise probability”, for example, by the big hit end processing in S117 shown in FIG. The When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of S239 is “big hit” (S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (S241). Also, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S242). As an example, in the process of S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value for determining the jackpot type includes a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either type. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the fluctuation random number buffer.

  After executing the processing of S242, the big hit type is stored (S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control buffer setting unit).

  If the special symbol display result is not “big hit” in S240 (S240; No), or after executing the processing of S243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (S244). ). As an example, if it is determined in S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is selected according to the determination result of the big hit type in S242. What is necessary is just to determine a fixed special symbol.

  After executing the process of S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (S245), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in S245 and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  In S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (S235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (S246), and then the special symbol normal process is performed. finish. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is not transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S261). If the big hit flag is on (S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (S261; No), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (S263).

  In the process of S262, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the decorative symbol variable display state is “non-reach” that does not reach the reach state, and the reach state is reached. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and the case of the variable display result (special drawing display result) being “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 11 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 to fluctuation pattern PA3-3 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is used at a predetermined rate as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit. To be determined. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the process of S263 shown in FIG. 9, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11B2, for example. In the process of S263, it is determined whether or not to change the variable display state of the decorative design to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost” by determining the variation pattern at the time of the loss. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effects in super reach, such as the variation pattern PB3-1 to variation pattern PB3-4, are the variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach such as PA3-3. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIG. 11B1 and FIG. 11B2, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, vary. It is set to be larger than the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “151” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be made different according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is read as the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is only necessary that a decision value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special drawing is high. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 11B2 regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes of S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (S264). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the processing of S264, a start condition is selected from a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any special figure game in which is established (S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of S265 is executed, command transmission setting at the time of starting the change of the special symbol is performed (S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The first variation start command and the second variation start command are also simply referred to as variation start commands. The change pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S 51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter mounted on the production control board 12. / Timer circuit) register settings, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S52; No), it waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command. . At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a first area provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. The first start opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number as the buffer number among the free areas in the command buffer at the start winning prize. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the empty area in the second start prize command buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like. Among them, the second start opening winning designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number.

  The first start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start slot prize designation command and first reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  The second start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (second start opening prize designation command and second reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the receiving order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” in the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process is executed (S55). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (S56), and numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. To do.

  Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main board 11, an error notification process (S57) for notifying the occurrence of abnormality is executed according to the command. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under the control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output. After execution of the error notification process, the process returns to S52.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (D1), which will be described later, the error image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (full screen display), or in FIG. 17 (D2). As shown, it may be one (partial display) displayed in a part of the display area of the image display device 5. Also, for example, if the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormal winning, an error image is displayed in a full-screen display mode, and the abnormality notification command indicates a ball removal error (the game ball stored in the lower plate has a specified amount). The display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type (severity) of the error, such as displaying in the partial display mode if it indicates an error when exceeding).

  In this embodiment, the error image is not deleted from the image display device 5 until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is resolved. Therefore, the error image is not deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (see FIG. 17D2), and the display of the error image has priority over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. . In this embodiment, as described later, the volume as a production effect can be adjusted by the player's operation, but the error sound cannot be adjusted with the initial setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error despite the occurrence of some error.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 13, first, a change effect character display process is executed (S162). The change effect character display processing is for displaying an effect image indicating a character in the hold display change common effect on the screen of the image display device 5 based on a setting corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. Includes processing. The change effect character display process includes a process for determining whether or not a variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command) or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, This includes processing for performing display control of an effect image indicating a character according to the determination result.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect character display process executed in S162 of FIG. In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the character is being displayed (S601). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character is being displayed when the effect image indicating the character CH1 (change effect character) shown in FIG. 15B used in the hold display change common effect is displayed. That's fine.

  If the character is not being displayed in S601 (S601; No), it is determined whether there is a change effect setting (S602). For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the storage content of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern in the hold display data storage unit and information corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect is stored, It may be determined that there is a change effect setting. If there is no change effect setting (S602; No), the change effect character display process is terminated.

  If there is a change effect setting in S602 (S602; Yes), after performing control to start display on the screen of the image display device 5 for the effect image indicating the change effect character (S603), The change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S603, the effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the change effect character according to the determination result of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set as the action mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the stationary mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example.

  The action mode may be a display position, a size, a rotation amount, a movement direction, a movement speed, a movement amount of a change effect character, a part of the shape, pattern, or color of the change effect character according to an animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be a display mode of change display (operation display) that changes over time. The change of the change effect character according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. In contrast to such an action mode, the still mode may be a static display mode in which the change effect character does not change over time. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as a non-static mode or a behavior mode.

  The effect image indicating the change effect character whose display is started by executing the process of S603 is a character used for the action effect in the hold display change effect (for example, the character CH1 as shown in FIG. 15B). It is an image which shows. By performing the process of S603, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed before the variable display in which the hold display change effect is executed is started. In this case, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays.

  If the character is being displayed in S601 (S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined display end timing (S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, or when the execution of the hold display change effect by the hold display change pattern is ended. Any timing may be used as long as a predetermined display end condition for the change effect character is satisfied. If it is the display end timing (S604; Yes), the effect image indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character is controlled to end the display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S605), and then the change is performed. The effect character display process is terminated.

  If it is not the change end timing (S604; No), it is determined whether or not a change start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S606). In the processing of S606, it may be determined that a variation start command has been received when either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. If a change start command has been received (S606; Yes), after setting for starting display control during change (S607), the change effect character display processing is terminated. In the process of S607, for example, when it is determined that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the process of S603, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is displayed. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into an action mode by reception of the change start command which can specify the start of variable display.

  If no change start command is received in S606 (S606; No), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S608). If no symbol confirmation command is received (S608; No), the change effect character display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation command is received (S608; Yes), after the setting for starting the symbol confirmation display control is performed (S609), the change effect character display processing is terminated. In the process of S609, for example, as in the case of determining that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed in the process of S603, a display control command for instructing that the display mode of the change effect character is set to the static mode is displayed control. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, in the period when the display result in variable display is derived | led-out, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into a static mode.

  FIG. 15 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for assigning Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 15B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen preview display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer, and a symbol preview display layer. ing. The error display effect image is drawn on the error display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. When the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is drawn on the adjustment result image display layer. In the full screen preview display layer, a full screen preview display image used for the full screen preview effect is drawn. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character or the like used in the hold display change effect is drawn. On the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image showing the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is drawn. In the symbol notice display layer, an image of the symbol notice display used in the symbol notice effect is drawn. The image of the symbol preview display may be a preview display related to the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, for example, the image G is positioned around the decorative symbol and has a display form such as an aura (lighting) of the decorative symbol. It is said. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. By setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. 15A, an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen notice display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer The Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the symbol preview display layers has a different value depending on the display layer on which the effect image is drawn.

  For example, the VDP of the display control unit 123 may determine the priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing image data read from the CGROM into a frame buffer of the VRAM. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large value as the Z value. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, the error image display layer sets the Z value so that the error image display layer is arranged on the foremost side, so that the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 17D1 and 17D2). Is set higher than other effect images. In addition, the Z value is set so that the small symbol display layer is arranged on the front side next to the error display layer as seen from the player. Therefore, even when a display effect is displayed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the image display measure 5, the small symbol variable display in the small symbol display area 5V is always performed unless it overlaps the error image. The player can see it. Further, the Z value is set so that the adjustment result image display layer is arranged on the front side next to the small symbol display layer. As a result, the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the sound volume can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side from the image of the full screen notice display, the effect image indicating the decorative design, and the like. Also, the Z value is set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the full-screen preview image used in the full-screen preview effect can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design, and the decorative design can be hidden. Note that the Z value may be set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the adjustment result image display layer. The change effect display layer is on the rear side of the small symbol display layer, but the Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the effect image used by the hold display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. In this way, the effect image showing the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design that is the identification information image. Also, the Z value is set so that the symbol preview display layer is arranged next to the decorative symbol display layer. As a result, the symbol preview image used in the symbol preview effect can be arranged in an overlapping position on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol, and a display that decorates the decorative symbol from the back (for example, an aura display of the decorative symbol) )It can be performed.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process executed in S163 of FIG. In this embodiment, by executing the effect effect setting process described below, during the game (see FIGS. 17A1 and 17A) and during the customer waiting demonstration display (see FIG. 17B), The volume as a production effect can be adjusted by the player's adjustment operation. Further, when the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is displayed in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demo image in a predetermined area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 17A1, 17A2, 17C2, and the like, the adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode that increases or decreases in the left-right direction. Note that the mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode that displays a numerical value or a character corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like.

  In this embodiment, during the menu mode, the item “volume adjustment” is selected from the menu screen (see FIG. 17C1) and the volume adjustment mode is being selected (see FIG. 17C2). The volume can be adjusted only when While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in response to receiving a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the mode shifts from the customer waiting demonstration display to the menu mode.

  When the effect effect setting process shown in FIG. 16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (S701). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the flag is off. Note that the menu mode execution flag is set to an on state in S662, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in S661 (see FIG. 19).

  When the menu mode is not being executed (S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to an on state in S708 and S715, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in S704 and S712.

  When the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 that has been determined in advance has elapsed since the adjustment operation was received (S703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 31A, for example, and in this embodiment, is an operation for adjusting the volume as the effect. . The player adjusts the volume from within a predetermined range (for example, six levels 1 to 6) by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left and right, for example, and the volume at the point when the tilt operation is stopped. The volume is determined as an adjustment result.

  Note that the sound volume determination operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or pushing the push button 31B separately from the adjustment operation. Further, the operation means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button or a dial type operation means (not shown). In addition, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor) may be used to adjust the production effect by the player's adjustment operation detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is set in advance as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds) in this embodiment. Note that whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was received corresponds to, for example, a predetermined timer corresponding to the predetermined period T1 when it is determined that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes) in S706 described later. Set a value and determine if the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display brightness (light quantity) of the image display device 5 or the effect effect lamp as an effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate a luminance adjustment result. Moreover, what is necessary is just to adjust at least one of a volume and a brightness | luminance according to adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length or different lengths. May be.

  In S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted (S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the adjustment result image R from the image display device 5, and turns off the adjustment result image display flag. The state is cleared (S704). With the process of S704, the adjustment result image R is erased when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation during a game or a demonstration display. Subsequent to the process of S704, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S706. Also, if the determination in S702 or S703 is No, the process in S706 is executed.

  In S701, when the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (S705; Yes), the process of S706 is executed. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines that the volume adjustment mode is selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not selected if the flag is off. Note that the volume adjustment mode selection flag is set to an on state in S664 described later, and is cleared to an off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode selection other than the volume adjustment is performed during execution of the menu mode, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to an off state. When the volume adjustment mode is selected (S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without performing the process of S704. Even in the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed. Even if the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is not being selected (S705; No), the effect setting process is terminated.

  In S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an adjustment operation has been performed. For example, when an operation signal from the stick controller 31A (for example, an operation signal indicating a tilting operation in the left-right direction) is input, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes), and performs the adjustment operation. The corresponding volume setting value is stored in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 (S707). In the processing of S707 as well, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed and remains the initial setting value.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 displays the adjustment result image R for notifying the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation on the image display device 5, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state (S708). If the adjustment result image R is already being displayed (Yes in S702, No in S703, Yes in S706), the adjustment result image for notifying the volume setting value according to the current adjustment operation. R is displayed on the image display device 5 (updated and displayed from the adjustment result image R corresponding to the previous adjustment operation), and the adjustment result image display flag is kept on.

  After the execution of the process of S708 or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of S706 (S706; No), the process of S710 is executed.

  In S710, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variable display result derivation display period T2 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “derivation display period”). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is turned on when starting a process of completely stopping (deriving and displaying) a confirmed decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of a decorative symbol in an effect processing during variable display described later. Whether or not it is the derivation display period T2 is determined based on a flag that is set to be cleared to an off state when the process is completed. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, the derived display period T2 is shorter than the predetermined period T1 described above. Note that the derivation display period T2 does not have to be constant, and may be set so that, for example, the time-short state is shorter than the normal state.

  When it is the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S711), and if it is on (S711; Yes), the adjustment result image R is deleted, and the adjustment result image display flag is cleared to an off state (S712). Thus, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed since the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is deleted during the derived display period T2 (see FIGS. 18A and 18B described later).

  On the other hand, when it is not the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S713). If it is off, that is, if the adjustment result image R is not displayed (S713; No), the process of S714 is executed.

  In the process of S714, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (whether the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed). When the derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 returns (displays again) the adjustment result image R and turns on the adjustment result image display flag. The state is set (S715). As a result, even if the adjustment result image R has been deleted in the process of S712, not the derived display period T2 (S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has elapsed but is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes) ), The adjustment result image R is restored and displayed as shown in FIG.

  When the determination is YES in S713, the determination is NO in S705, S711, and S714, or after execution of S712 and S715, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect effect setting process.

  If the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated and the volume setting corresponding to the adjustment operation is invalidated without going through the processing of S706 or S707. May be. Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be returned to the default (initial setting value) at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific change, after a change is executed a specific number of times, a customer waiting demo display return timing, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. Moreover, the predetermined period T1 may be prepared in a plurality of types having different lengths, and may be used for each gaming state, for example. For example, the predetermined period may be 10 seconds in the short time state, and the predetermined period may be 5 seconds in the normal state.

  Here, a main example of the case where the adjustment result image R is erased during the derived display period T2 will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the predetermined period T1 is the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the most recent adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2 Are overlapped, the adjustment result image R is deleted (corresponding to S712). The example shown in FIG. 18A is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 18B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again (in S715). The display continues until the predetermined period T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derived display period T2 overlaps the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. Thus, according to this embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 17A1 is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the display area of the adjustment result image R is, as shown in FIG. 17A1, a decorative symbol display area Ar (an area including the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). It overlaps with a part of. FIG. 17A2 is a display example of the adjustment result image R particularly during the full screen notice, and the adjustment result image R is displayed over the full screen notice display. Note that the adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full screen notice. If the adjustment result image R is displayed in such an effect period, the interest of the full screen notice effect may be reduced. Therefore, the adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full screen notice, but may be adjustable. Or adjustment may be impossible.

  FIG. 17B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the demonstration display (during the customer waiting demonstration display). During the demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, an image indicating that the customer waiting demonstration such as “Demo Displaying” is being displayed is displayed on the image display device 5 and if an adjustment operation is performed, The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

  FIG. 17C1 is a display example of the menu screen during the menu mode. In this embodiment, in the menu mode, there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation by the player, and the volume adjustment is possible only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 17 (C2). It has become. The selection of the item in the menu mode can be performed by, for example, tilting the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is pushed or pulled while the “volume adjustment” item is selected, or the push button 31B is pressed. By pressing the button, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button (not shown). Note that the display form of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIGS. 17A1 and 17A2 and the volume adjustment mode selected in FIG. 17C2. For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than in the game, or may be displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

  FIGS. 17D1 and 17D2 are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error image is (i) the variable display result. It is not erased during the derivation display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

  After performing the effect setting process in S163 shown in FIG. 13, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, the following S170 to S175 are performed. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. The process etc. which determine whether or not are included. When the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process of determining the final decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result is included. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as an effect control timer setting unit). , And various kinds of effect control during variable display of the decorative design are included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is completely stopped and displayed. A process for (derived display) is included. In addition, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a completely stopped state (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 12 is autonomous even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used. It is possible to determine and display the variable display result by deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative design. After such effect control is performed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released. On the other hand, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is initialized. The value is updated to “0”.

  The effect process when the attacker is released in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect operations in a predetermined period when the grand prize opening door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the decoration LED. In the effect process at the time of opening the attacker, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effect are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S170 of FIG. 13 as variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command reception flag is in an ON state (S651). If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (S651; Yes), the variation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared to an off state (S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value “1” corresponding to the variable display start setting process (S171) (S653).

  If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is not on (that is, the variation pattern designation command has not been received) (S651; No), the effect control CPU 120 is displaying a customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demonstration). It is determined whether or not (S654). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, a customer waiting demonstration displaying flag that is set to an on state in accordance with the execution of S658 described later.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed (S654; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (S655). When the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (that is, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received) (S655; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command. It is determined whether the elapsed time has passed 30 seconds (S656). Whether or not the elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command has passed 30 seconds is determined by, for example, turning on the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag in the command analysis process (S54) shown in FIG. When the state is set, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether or not the timer has timed out.

  If 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (S656; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns off the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (S657) and at the image display device 5. A predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started (S658). The customer-waiting demonstration display is not limited to a mode of displaying a character string such as “Demo Displaying” as shown in FIG. 17B. For example, a predetermined initial appearance (for example, “123”) is possible. A combination of symbols such as “777” or a combination of symbols reminiscent of a big hit such as “777”, a predetermined character, or a logotype of a gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the customer waiting demonstration display is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command (corresponding to the case where the variable display is interrupted) is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started when 20 seconds or one minute has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Further, for example, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started immediately.

  Following the processing of S658 or when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (S654; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been a menu switching operation (S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, a push-down operation of the push button 31B that can be accepted during the customer waiting demonstration display. Judge that there was. The operation means that can accept the menu switching operation is arbitrary, and is not limited to the push button 31B.

  When there is a menu switching operation, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the menu mode execution flag is on (S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (S660; No), the customer waiting demonstration display is deleted and the menu display is started (the display on the image display device 5 is changed from FIG. 17 (B) to FIG. 17 (C1)). The menu mode execution flag is set to the on state (S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode execution flag is on (S660; Yes), the menu display is deleted and the customer waiting demonstration display is restored (the display on the image display device 5 is changed from FIG. 17 (C1) to FIG. 17 (B). The menu mode execution flag is cleared to an off state (S661).

  Subsequent to the processing of S662, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed (S663). Whether or not the volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed is determined, for example, by whether or not an operation signal is input from an operation unit that receives the operation (such as the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B as described above). do it. When there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (S663; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume adjustment mode selection flag to the on state (S664). After the execution of S653, S661, and S664, or in the case of No determination in S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S171 of FIG. 13 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (S321). As the processing of S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The final stop symbol is determined. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (lack)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)” and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is not in the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “lost”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is in the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the positive change state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the production control CPU 120 uses the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R to display different (unmatched) decorative symbols as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left determined symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to this, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referencing or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, etc. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of a certain decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern to be displayed) and a certain variation pattern (for example, a decorative pattern indicating an odd number) is to be a confirmed decorative pattern. In the jackpot promotion promotion, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable variation jackpot combination) that recalls a big hit in the image display device 5 but does not recall a probable change state (non-probable big hit combination) is once stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. This is an effect of notifying whether or not a certain change state is reached at the end of.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from the plural types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  Thus, by determining the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display content by the process of S321, whether or not to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the determination result of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game The variable display result of the decorative design related to the determination result can be determined. In the process of S321, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol may be determined as the display result in the variable symbol variable display.

  In the process of S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the decorative design is controlled to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination comprising the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of S321, the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Subsequent to the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in the process of S321, a change effect setting process for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. You may do it.

  Subsequent to the process of S322, the effect control CPU 120 executes a full-screen notice effect setting process (S322A) for setting a full-screen notice effect as a predetermined notice effect. In the full-screen notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B2, it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern by displaying a cover image such as a dark image DG over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. The execution setting of the notice effect (full screen notice effect) covering the entire screen such as the blackout effect is performed. Note that the cover image is not limited to the dark image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as a light emission mode image or a freeze mode image. Any image may be used as long as the decorative pattern display content is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. The predetermined notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, a cut-in notice, a story notice, a mini-game notice, an advance notice, etc. The notice effect that is displayed on the portion that can be hidden), and at least the decorative design (for example, the display form or display content of the decorative design) cannot be seen at all (not transparent) It may be a notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize, such as a display screen or a decorative pattern being seen through (low transparency). In addition, the process of S322A is set to “notice effect setting process”, and other notice effects other than the above-mentioned full screen notice effect, that is, other notice effects during variable display (step-up notice, serif notice, etc.) are simultaneously determined. You may make it do.

  Following the process of S322A, a symbol notice effect setting process (S322B) is executed. In the symbol notice effect setting process, for example, an aura (backlight) image G of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) and (D2). Execution setting of the notice effect (design notice effect) is performed. Note that the symbol notice effect is not limited to an aura display, but may be a notice related to or accompanied by a decorative pattern (for example, a character notice in which a character appears or a background notice in which the background display mode changes). It is good also as an advance notice which changes the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of itself into the display mode different from a usual decoration design. For example, in the case of a character notice, a plurality of character notices having different character costumes, sizes, poses, types, and the like may be provided, or a plurality of background notices having different background display forms may be provided.

  Following the process of S322B, a symbol reverse start display setting process (S322C) is executed. In the symbol reverse direction start display setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B1, for example, a specific direction (for example, forward direction (downward direction)) different from a predetermined direction (for example, forward direction (downward direction)) of the display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of the change The execution of the symbol reverse start display is performed such that the decorative symbol starts (starts fluctuation or displacement) in the reverse direction (upward direction, etc.) opposite to the forward direction. In this embodiment, the predetermined direction in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable (variable) manner is the downward direction, but may be an upward direction, a left direction, a right direction, an oblique direction, a forward direction, a backward direction, or the like. . Examples of the predetermined direction include a basic change direction, a direction in which identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, a change direction that the player sees most (exclusively), The normal direction such as the fluctuation direction when the derived display is performed is included. In addition, the specific direction is the reverse direction (upward direction), but may be a direction other than the upward direction and different from the forward direction (for example, left direction, right direction, diagonal direction, forward direction, backward direction, etc.). In FIG. 20, the full screen notice effect setting process (S322A), the symbol notice effect setting process (S322B), and the symbol reverse start display setting process (S322C) are executed in this order, but in an order other than this order. There may be.

  Subsequent to the process of S322C, a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process (S322D) is executed. In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process, when there is no full screen notice effect, the symbol notice effect timing is set at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26B, adjustment is performed such that the symbol notice effect timing is changed after the full screen notice execution period.

  Following the process of S322D, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of effect control patterns (special-fluctuation effect control control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and uses it as the use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of provided effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses pattern Set as.

  Subsequent to the process of S323, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command ( S324). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (S325). At this time, for example, a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Thus, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Also, in the process of S325, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol and starting the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, a small symbol (first small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and a special symbol game using the second special symbol. A small symbol (second small symbol) whose variable display is started in synchronization may be arranged separately. As an example, the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is arranged on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The second small symbol variably displayed may be arranged on the left side in the small symbol display area 5V. Thus, by confirming which one of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, which of the special game using the first special graphic and the special graphic game using the second special graphic is executed. It is only necessary for a player or the like to be able to identify whether the game is being played. When the first small symbol and the second small symbol are separately arranged, for example, based on a change start command transmitted from the main board 11, a special game using the first special graphic and the second special graphic are used. What is necessary is just to determine which variable display in which special figure game is started among the special figure games using. When the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started, while when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second special figure game is started. What is necessary is just to start the variable display of a small symbol. As described above, in the small symbol display area 5V, the effect image indicating the first small symbol that becomes the first notification information image is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol, and the display result is derived. The display result may be derived by performing variable display of the effect image indicating the second small symbol that becomes the second notification information image in synchronization with the special game using the second special figure.

  After the process of S325 is executed, the first hold display of the first hold display unit 5HR, the second hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL, and the like are updated in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols. To make the setting (S326). For example, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the leftmost display part) corresponding to the holding number “1” in the first holding display part 5HR is deleted ( The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part on the right end) corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the second holding display part 5HL. (Digestion) and move (shift) the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one in the right direction. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322A of FIG. 20 as the full screen notice effect setting process. In the full-screen notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach change pattern or a non-reach change pattern based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. Determine (S501). If it is determined that the pattern is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S501; Yes), the presence / absence of a full screen notice effect is determined (S502).

  Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the full screen notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the full screen notice determination table shown in FIG. To determine whether to execute the full screen notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%, and a super reach (loss) variation pattern Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution is” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the full-screen notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, so that the full-screen notice effect can be expected to be a big hit, and the fun of the game is improved. The super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a decision ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  After execution of the process of S502, it is determined whether or not there is a full screen notice effect (S503). If it is determined that there is a full-screen notice effect (S503; Yes), the full-screen notice flag is set to the on state (S504). After execution of the process of S504, the forward (downward) variation start timing of the decorative symbol is changed to the second timing (timing T03) after the end of the full screen notice effect (S505). For example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 28 (B), when there is a symbol reverse start display (reverse variation) at the start of variation, the start timing of the forward variation is the timing T01 (first timing). Instead, the timing is changed to timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full screen notice effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 30B, when there is no symbol reverse start display (reverse fluctuation) at the start of the fluctuation, the start timing of the forward fluctuation is the timing T03 (second timing) after the end of the full screen notice effect. ).

  If it is determined in S501 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no full-screen notice effect in S503, or after executing the processing in S505, The screen preview effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322B of FIG. 20 as the symbol notice effect setting process. In the symbol notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach change pattern or a non-reach change pattern based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S511). When it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S511; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol notice effect is determined (S512).

  Specifically, in the process of S512, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advance notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the symbol advance notice determining table shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the symbol notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the symbol notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. The super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a decision ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  After execution of the process of S512, it is determined whether or not the symbol notice effect is determined to be present (S513). When it is determined that the symbol notice effect is present (S513; Yes), the symbol notice flag is set to the on state (S514). After executing the process of S514, the type of symbol notice is determined (S515).

  Specifically, in the process of S515, the CPU 120 for effect control extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advancement effect type, and at the same time, the extracted numerical data and the symbol notification effect type determination table shown in FIG. Are used to determine the type of symbol notice effect, that is, the color of the aura of the decorative symbol (color of the aura image G). For example, as shown in FIG. 22C, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “blue” is 50% and “green” is 40%. % And “red” are determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined with a probability of 10%, “green” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “red” is determined with a probability of 60%. The The expectation level of the jackpot is larger in the order of blue <green <red, and the expectation of the jackpot can be expected for the type of symbol notice effect (difference in the color of the aura). Can improve the fun of the game. Note that “red” in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern shown in FIG. 22C may be set to 0%. In this case, the red color of the aura can be used as a premium symbol advance notice that is a big hit.

  If it is determined in S511 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S511; No), if there is no symbol announcement effect in S513, or after the processing of S515, The effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322C in FIG. 20 as the symbol reverse start display setting process. In the symbol reverse start display setting process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. Is determined (S521). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S521; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol reverse start display is determined (S522).

  Specifically, in the process of S522, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol reverse start display, and determines the extracted numerical data and the symbol reverse start display determination shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the symbol reverse start display is determined using the table. For example, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90%, and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%, and a super reach (loss) fluctuation pattern. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big win, the symbol reverse start display is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and the symbol reverse direction start display can have a big hit expectation, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  After execution of the process of S522, it is determined whether or not the symbol reverse start display is determined to be present (S523). When it is determined that there is a symbol reverse start display (S523; Yes), symbol reverse start display control setting is performed (S524). For example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A) and (B), a display for executing the reverse direction change of the decorative symbol in the reverse change period (that is, the period from the change timing T01 to the reverse change end timing T03). Perform control settings. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no symbol reverse start display (S523; No), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S525).

  If the all-screen notice flag is on (S525; Yes), it is set to the symbol swing during the all-design notice effect period (S526). As shown in FIG. 30B, during the all symbols notice effect period (the period from the fluctuation start timing T01 to the full screen notice pay timing T03), the display setting is set so that the decorative symbols swing horizontally in the reference position Ref. Is done. The swing of the decorative pattern is hidden by the blackout effect (full screen notice) shown in FIGS. 31 (B2) and 31 (B3) and cannot be visually recognized by the player. When the period of the full screen notice effect is shorter than the period from the start of the change of the symbol to the start of the forward change, the swing of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the period of the timing T11 to T12 and the period of the timing T13 to T14. It becomes. On the other hand, if the full-screen notice flag is not on (S525; No), as shown in FIG. 30A, the forward change start timing of the decorative symbol is set to the change start timing T01 (first timing). (S527).

  When it is determined in S521 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S521; No), or after execution of the processing of S524, S526, and S527, the symbol reverse start display setting processing is terminated. .

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322D of FIG. 20 as the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process. In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol notice flag is on (S531). If the symbol notice flag is on (S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S532). If the full screen notice flag is on (S532; Yes), the symbol notice effect is set after the end of the full screen notice effect period (S533). On the other hand, if the full screen notice flag is off (S532; No), the symbol notice effect is set at the start of the fluctuation (S534). When the symbol notice flag is off in S531 (S531; No), or after executing the processing of S533 and S534, the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process is terminated.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S172 of FIG. 13 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 25, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (S341). As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Accordingly, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. Alternatively, it is only necessary that a predetermined display device can execute the hold display change effect by combining some or all of them.

  In addition, the display of the effect image showing the character (change effect character) in the hold display change common effect among the hold display change effects is started by executing the process of S603 shown in FIG. The display control is performed during variable display or at the time of symbol determination by executing the process of S609, and the display is ended by executing the process of S605. Therefore, in the process of S343, the display control related to the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the hold display change effect is executed, the display of the change effect character is controlled in the process of S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect character in the process of S343. The display control may not be performed.

  When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), after executing the process of S343, whether or not it is the full screen notice effect period for executing the full screen notice effect. Is determined (S344). When it is the full screen notice effect period (S344; Yes), control for executing the full screen notice effect is performed (S344A).

  When it is determined in S344 that it is not the full screen notice effect period (S344; No), after executing the process of S344A, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol notice effect period for executing the symbol notice effect. (S344B). If it is the symbol notice effect period (S344B; Yes), control for executing the symbol notice effect is performed (S345).

  When it is determined in S344B that it is not the symbol notice effect period (S344B; No), it is a symbol reverse start display period for executing the symbol reverse start display after executing the process of S345. Is determined (S345A). When it is the symbol reverse start display period (S345A; Yes), control for executing the symbol reverse start display is performed (S345B). Further, immediately after S345, immediately after S345B, etc., other notice effects during variable display (step-up notice, serif notice, etc.) may be executed.

  When it is determined in S345A that it is not the symbol reverse start period (S345A; No), after executing the process of S345B, it is determined whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing a reach effect ( S346). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that it is the reach effect period (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (S347).

  When it is determined in S346 that it is not the reach effect period (S346; No), after executing the process of S347, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on the above, control for executing effects during variable display including variable display operation of decorative symbols is performed (S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  When a symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, a display result in a variable symbol display such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) is derived and displayed (S350). In the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control for terminating the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. In this small symbol variation end control, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of S321 shown in FIG. 20 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V as a display result in the variable symbol variable display. That's fine. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable variable symbol display is synchronized with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol. When the variable display is terminated after being derived, the variable display of the small symbols can also be ended. At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (S351). Further, in the process of S351A, the full screen notice flag and the symbol notice flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Further, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S352), the effect process during variable display is ended.

  For example, in the process of S348 shown in FIG. 25, the display control in the small symbol display area 5V is performed so that the small symbols are always variably displayed in a constant variation mode regardless of the variable display state of the decorative symbols. You can do it. For example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a reach state or when a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. Even when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in part or all in 5R, the small symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V. Can be done.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball that has been driven into the game area passes through (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and a start winning such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. Based on the establishment of the start condition that permits the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, variable symbol special symbol display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, the processing of S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 1 is added to the number stored in the first special figure hold. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening, the processing of S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 1 is added to the number of second special figure storage. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the process of S209. In S212, the winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 5 is executed to determine the variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and the winning determination result is determined. A winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Then, it is determined whether or not an effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning including the winning determination result command has been received. If it is determined that there is a command reception, the presence or type of the hold display change effect is determined based on the specified winning determination result. If it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, whether or not there is a display change is determined. When it is determined that there is a display change, a hold display change pattern is determined, and when it is determined that there is no display change, a change effect timing pattern is determined. The determination results of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern are stored in association with the hold number in the hold display data storage unit.

  In S602 shown in FIG. 14, it is determined whether or not there is a setting for executing a change effect such as a hold display change effect based on the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit. If it is determined that there is a setting, display of the effect image indicating the character (change effect character) is started by the display start control in S603. The effect image indicating the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined in S606 that a change start command has been received, so that the control start setting in S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the change effect character is the decorative pattern. The action mode corresponds to the variable display (during change). On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, so that the control start setting in S609 is performed, and the effect image showing the change effect character The display mode is a static mode corresponding to the fixed display of the decorative symbol. In this way, the display mode of the effect image showing the character can be set to the stationary mode during the period in which the display result of the effect image showing the decorative design that becomes the identification information image is derived.

  When variable display of a special game or decorative design is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a variation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 9 is executed in S111 shown in FIG. A change pattern designation command that determines any one of them and indicates the determined change pattern is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In S321 shown in FIG. 20, when the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, etc., and subsequently in the change effect setting processing in S322, it is determined that it is the hold display change timing. Is set to execute the hold display change effect. Subsequently, in the full-screen notice effect setting process of S322A, the presence / absence of the full-screen notice effect is determined, and when it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is present, execution setting of the full-screen notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notification effect setting process of S322B, the presence / absence of the symbol notice effect is determined, and when the symbol notice effect is determined to be present, execution setting of the symbol notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol reverse start display setting process of S322C, the presence / absence of the symbol reverse start display is determined. When it is determined that the symbol reverse start display is present, the symbol reverse start display execution setting is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process of S322D, the adjustment setting of the symbol notice effect timing is performed. Then, in S172 shown in FIG. 25, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (variable display) based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result of the ornament symbol is determined. The decoration symbol is completely stopped (derived display). In each effect period during the variable display, a full screen notice effect, a symbol notice effect, a symbol reverse start display, a reach effect, and the like can be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, an example in the case where the symbol change effect and the reverse change in the case of the presence / absence of the full screen notice effect are displayed will be described. FIG. 26 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, and FIG. 26A shows a case where no full screen notice effect is executed and FIG. 26B shows a case where a full screen notice effect is executed. . FIG. 27 shows an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 26 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 27 (A) and (B1) to (E1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 26 (A), and FIGS. 27 (A) and (B2) to (E2) are illustrated in FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 26 (A), in the decorative symbol variation display, reverse variation of all decorative symbols is started at the start of the variation (timing T01), and reverse variation is terminated (timing T03). When the variation of the decorative pattern in the forward direction is started, the variation becomes high-speed variation, and thereafter, the variation of the decorative symbols on the left and right is decelerated to reach the reach display mode (reach establishment), and the reach effect is executed. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 26A, it is determined that the full screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative symbol reverse start display and the symbol notice effect are started. . The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of the reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 27 (B1). A reverse (upward) direction change opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 27 (B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue or green) around the decorative symbol , Red, etc.), a notice effect in which an aura (afterglow) image G is displayed is also started. Then, at the end of the reverse direction change (timing T03) shown in FIG. 26 (A), the reverse change of the decorative pattern is stopped as shown in FIG. 27 (C1), and the decorative form is shown as shown in FIG. 27 (D1). The variation of the symbol in the forward direction is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variation in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 27 (E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 26B, since the execution of the full-screen notice effect is determined to be performed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, a full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 27 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen notice effect in FIG. 27 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 27 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 27 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 27 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. In addition, although the reverse direction start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 27 (B2) and (C2). can not see. The notification image shown in FIG. 27 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (D2), the design notice effect is started before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but the decorative symbol has returned to the reference position Ref as indicated by a dashed line arrow. The symbol notice effect may be executed. In addition, the execution period of the symbol notice effect is shorter than the backward fluctuation execution period as shown in FIG. 26A, but may be the same as or longer than the backward fluctuation execution period. The same applies to the case where the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, an example will be described in which the symbol change effect is not displayed and the reverse variation is displayed in the case where the full screen notice effect is present. FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, etc. In FIG. 28A, when the symbol change effect and the full screen notice effect are not executed, the reverse change is executed. Shows a case where there is no execution of the symbol notice effect and the reverse variation is executed with the full screen notice effect. FIG. 29 shows an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 28 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 29 (A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 28 (A), and FIGS. 29 (A), (B2), (E). C2), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG.

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 28A is the same as that shown in FIG. As for each notice effect, in FIG. 28A, it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect are not executed, and the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T01. The direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of the reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at an example of the performance at this time, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 29 (B1). Reverse direction (upward) fluctuation opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and at the end of reverse direction fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 28 (A), decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 29 (C1). The reverse variation of the symbol is stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol in the forward direction is started as shown in FIG. 29 (D1), and the decorative symbol is displayed in the forward direction over the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 29 (E1). It will be done.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 28B, it is determined that the symbol notice effect is not executed, and the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are determined to be executed. Starts at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends at timing T03. At the end of the reverse direction change (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, a full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 29 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 29 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the full-screen notice effect in FIG. 29 (C2) ends, that is, as shown in FIG. In addition, although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 29 (B2) and (C2). I can't see the change. In addition, the notification image shown in FIG. 29C2 is included in the full-screen notice effect, but may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the fluctuating display in the forward direction can be visually recognized before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref. The change display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, an example will be described in which the symbol change effect is executed in the case where the reverse direction change is not executed and there is a full screen notice effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change, and (B), no execution of the reverse direction change. The case where there is execution of the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect is shown. FIG. 31 shows an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 30 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 31 (A) and (B1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 30 (A), and FIGS. 31 (A), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 30A is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 30 (A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect and the reverse change of the decorative symbol are not executed, and the symbol notice effect at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The symbol notice effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. Note that the forward variation of the decorative pattern is also started at the start of the variation (timing T01). Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 31 (B1). The change to the direction (downward) is started, and the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 31 (B1), that is, the aura of the predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol (rear) The notice effect that the image G of light is displayed is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 30B, since it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are to be executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 31 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 31 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect in FIG. 31 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 31 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 31 (D2), not at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 31 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), since it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are executed, and it is determined that the decorative symbol is not changed in the reverse direction, FIG. 31 (B2), ( During the execution period of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), the decorative symbols are swung as shown in FIG. 30B, but are hidden behind the full screen notice effect. Therefore, the player cannot see the swing of the decorative symbols. The start of the change in the forward direction of the decorative symbol is changed after the end of the execution period of all symbol notice effects. Further, the notification image shown in FIG. 31 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but it may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

  Here, an example of the case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 shows an effect execution example in the case of including the display of the operation promotion image P and a predetermined cut-in effect in the super reach variation pattern.

  When the decorative symbol variable display (variation) is executed and the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 32 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and thereafter FIG. 32 (B). The development notification image to the super reach is performed by displaying on the image display device 5 the development notification image (in the illustrated example, “super reach!”) As shown in FIG. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 32B (corresponding to S710 in FIG. 16).

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 32C (start of the operation promotion display). Then, when an operation with the push button 31B is performed, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. Note that, when the operation with the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32E, for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to S712) as shown in FIG. 32E even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 14, when it is determined in S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in S602 whether or not there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, when it is determined that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the stored content of the hold display data storage unit, the process of S603 is executed. Thereby, for example, the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 15B is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  After that, for example, the hold display change common effect including the effect that the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 15B acts on a predetermined hold display (for example, the hold display of the hold number “3”) is executed. . Subsequently, an on-hold display change effect according to the presence or absence of the display change and the determination result of the on-hold display change pattern is executed. For example, when the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown) is determined as “with display change” and the hold display change pattern determination process (not shown) is determined as the first hold display change pattern, As a display mode of the hold display, a hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed. On the other hand, when “no display change” is determined in the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown), the hold display change failure effect (hold change change effect) in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is executed. The

  Even when a definite decorative symbol that is a display result in decorative symbol variable display is derived, the effect image indicating the character CH1 continues until the display end timing is determined in the process of S604 shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, if it is determined in step S608 that a symbol confirmation command has been received, the process in step S609 is executed. As a result, during the period in which the definitive decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 is the still mode. Subsequently, when variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, etc. is started based on the number of reserved memories being other than “0”, it is determined that a change start command has been received in the processing of S606 shown in FIG. As a result, the process of S607 is executed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode triggered by the reception of the change start command that becomes the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

  In the period in which the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is derived, the effect indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character The display mode of the image is a static mode. With the setting of the display layer as shown in FIG. 15B, the effect image showing the character CH1 can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as seen from the player than the effect image showing the decoration design. It is displayed with priority over the effect image shown. By making the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing such a decorative design as a stationary mode, the player can display the decorative design in a variable display. It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived, and to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B), 28 (B), and 30 (B), Since the variable display is started in the forward direction (predetermined direction) of the decorative symbol (identification information) after the execution period of the full-screen notice effect has elapsed (for example, at timing T03), it is difficult to understand the movement of the decorative symbol. Can be prevented. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, the predetermined direction in which the decorative design (identification information) is variably displayed is a normal direction (a forward direction such as a downward direction). For example, the normal direction (forward direction) includes a basic change direction for variable display (fluctuation display) of decorative symbols, a direction in which identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, a game The direction of change that the person sees most (specially sees), the direction of change when the derived display is performed, and the like are included. That is, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern (identification information) from starting to move in the normal direction (forward direction) in variable display.

  In addition, the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be in an advantageous state. Further, after the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) elapses (for example, timing T03 shown in FIGS. 26B, 28B, and 30B), the decorative symbol (identification information) is displayed. ) Is started in a predetermined direction (variable display), it is possible to prevent the movement of the decorative symbol (identification information) from becoming difficult to understand.

  Further, the image display device 5 (variable display means) displays the decorative pattern (identification information) in a specific direction (for example, the reverse direction shown in FIGS. 27B1 and 29B1) different from a predetermined direction (for example, the forward direction). Etc.), the direction of the variable display becomes diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 28B, the image display device 5 (variable display means) is a decorative pattern (identification information) at least during the execution period of the full screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect). Since the identification information is variably displayed in a specific direction, the identification information can be variably displayed in the reverse direction (specific direction) and then variably displayed in the forward direction (predetermined direction) different from the reverse direction. The variable display can be a preparation effect (or a preparation pattern) for variable display in the forward direction (predetermined direction). In particular, when the specific direction is the reverse direction of the predetermined direction as in this embodiment, the variable direction can be variably displayed in the reverse direction (specific direction) and then the force can be variably displayed in the predetermined direction. Can provide a variable display. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, at the start of variable display in a predetermined direction (forward direction), as shown in FIG. 27 (B1) and FIG. 31 (B1), a symbol notice effect (identification information notice) is executed to improve the interest of the game it can. In addition, since a plurality of symbol notice effects are provided (for example, blue, green, and red aura display shown in FIG. 22C), a plurality of symbol notice effects can be executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  Further, when the symbol notice effect (identification information notice) and the full screen notice effect (predetermined notice effect) are executed, after the end of the full screen notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 30B). As shown in FIG. 27 (D2) and FIG. 31 (D2), the symbol preview effect is executed at the timing T03), so that the symbol preview effect and the full screen preview are prevented from being executed at the same time. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from becoming unrecognizable or difficult to view due to all the design advance notice effects. In other words, the recognizability of the symbol notice effect can be improved, such as the player can clearly recognize the symbol notice effect.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above includes adjustment means realized by the effect control CPU 120 cooperating with each unit, and adjustment image display means. The adjustment means can adjust the effect in accordance with the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) by the player at least during execution of variable display, and the adjustment image display means can adjust the adjustment result image R () corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means. An example of the adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined period T1. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R not visible during the variable display result derived display period T2 in the predetermined period T1. Since it did in this way, the fall of the recognition property of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the example which can adjust a sound volume was demonstrated above, the display effect etc. of the image display apparatus 5 etc. may be sufficient as the presentation effect which can be adjusted as mentioned above. Further, the adjustable effect may be at least one of volume and brightness (that is, both volume and brightness may be adjustable). The adjustment image may be displayed not only when the volume is changed by the adjustment operation, but also when the volume is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible in the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a translucent manner or blinking in the derivation display period T2. It may be difficult to view. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In this case, for example, a process of displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-view mode is executed instead of S712 in FIG. 16, and the display is returned from the display in the difficult-to-view mode in S715. The effect effect setting process may be modified and configured such that the image is restored).

  Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjustment image may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, since the adjustment image can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of information displayed on the image display device 5. The specific effect image displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P, the development notification image (see FIG. 32B), but also the image indicating the character CH1 or the above-described fourth design. Or an image showing a hold display.

  Further, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjusting means may not adjust the effect related to the error notification. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, the error sound and the display brightness of the error image can be kept at the specified values, so that it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even if some error has occurred. . The effects related to error notification that the adjusting means do not adjust include not only the error volume but also the brightness (light quantity) when an error image is displayed, the brightness of a lamp (such as the game effect lamp 9) that is lit when an error occurs, etc. It may be.

  Further, at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 17A1). In this way, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result. The derived display area of the variable display result in which at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps is not limited to the decorative design display area Ar (see FIG. 17 (A1)), and the effect image showing the small design can be variably displayed. It may be a small symbol display area 5V in which display results are derived.

  Further, the error image may not be deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result (see, for example, FIG. 17 (D2)). In this way, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  Further, display of an error image is prioritized over display of an adjusted image (for example, until the effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command in step S57 eliminates the error indicated by the command in FIG. 17 (D1)). , (D2) may continue to be displayed). Even in this case, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  When the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is kept visible (for example, see FIG. 17B), but when the menu display operation is performed, the demonstration display is deleted (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is used). , S659, S660, and S662 may be executed). By doing so, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  In addition, a specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the change effect character display process in S162) capable of displaying the specific effect image during the variable display of the identification information is provided, and the specific effect image is at least The identification information can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 15B), and the specific effect executing means can identify the identification information during a period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived Alternatively, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to a static mode at a position overlapping the front side (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of S609). In this way, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  In addition, the gaming machine is smaller than the first area where the identification information image is displayed (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), and is always visible. In the area (for example, the small symbol display area 5V), the display information is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the identification information image and the display result is derived (for example, the effect of executing the processes of S325 and S350) A control CPU 120 or the like). In such a configuration, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  Also, information output means (for example, the process of S266) that outputs display control information (for example, a first change start command, a second change start command, etc.) that can specify that variable display is started according to the determination result of the decision means. And the effect execution means may set the display mode of the specific effect image to a non-stationary mode (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of S607) with the reception of display control information as a trigger. Part). By doing so, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result while suppressing the uncomfortable feeling of the specific performance.

  Further, the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image (see, for example, FIG. 15B), and the specific effect execution means includes the identification information. In a period in which an image display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest while preventing misperception of the display result.

  Further, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize is not limited to the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjustment image may be invisible or difficult to view during a reach action (for example, during full rotation). In other words, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized may be a predetermined period during which the target to be recognized by the player is notified. Further, the adjustment image may be displayed at a position where it is superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Further, the effect related to error notification may be adjustable by the adjusting means. In addition, the display area of the adjustment image may not overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. A part of the configuration may be provided.

(Modification 1)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 28 (B), the execution period of the full screen notice effect and the execution period of the reverse direction change completely coincide, that is, the full screen notice. Although the effect and the backward direction change start at the same timing and end at the same time, as shown in FIG. 33, the execution period of the full screen notice effect may be shorter than the reverse direction change period. In FIG. 33, the reverse direction fluctuation starts at the timing of the fluctuation start (that is, timing T11) and ends at timing T14. In contrast, the full screen notice effect starts at timing T12 later than timing T11 and ends at timing T13 before timing T14. According to the first modification, it is possible to visually recognize the variation (variable display) in the reverse direction (upward direction) of the decorative symbols in the period from the timing T11 to T12 and the period from the timing T13 to T14. The change in the reverse direction (upward direction) of the decorative symbol may be visible only in either one of the period of timing T11 to T12 or the period of timing T13 to T14.

(Modification 2)
In the above embodiment, the variation in the reverse direction of the decorative symbol is assumed to vary in the reverse direction by about one decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 27 (C1). In this way, the type of symbol reverse start display can be selected. Specifically, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), there is a process (S523A) for determining the type of symbol reverse starting, and a plurality of types (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B)). 3 types of “small”, “medium”, and “large”). In the “small” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by one, in the “medium” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by two, and in the “large” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by three. By the process of S523A, one type of reverse direction fluctuation is selected from these three types. Specifically, in the process of S523A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for design reverse direction start display type determination, and the extracted numerical data and the reverse design start display shown in FIG. 34 (B). Using the type determination table, the type of the symbol reverse start display, that is, the mode of the reverse direction variation of the decorative symbol is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 34B, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “small” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “small” is 50% and “medium” is 40. % And “Large” are determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super-reach (big hit) variation pattern, “Small” is determined with a probability of 10%, “Medium” with 30%, and “Large” with a probability of 60%. The The jackpot expectation level is that the amount of return of the decorative symbol increases in the order of small <medium <large, and you can have a big hit expectation about the type of reverse variation of the decorative symbol (difference in the amount of reverse of the symbol) It is possible to have fun with the design reverse start display, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, a plurality of types of full screen notice effects may be provided, and the type of full screen notice may be selectable. For example, the types of full-screen preview effects include those with different execution periods of full-screen preview effects, different transparency, different notification contents shown in FIG. There are different (sound effect, music, etc.), a combination of two or more of these, and the jackpot expectation may be different. The longer the execution period, the lower the transparency, the higher the notification effect shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the higher the effect, and the higher the output sound or the specific output sound, Good.

(Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern can be changed in the reverse direction (reverse starting shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) and (C1)) as shown in FIG. 26, but the reverse as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. It may be possible to swing instead of changing the direction (Modification 3). In the third modification, the reverse direction in S322C shown in FIGS. 20 and 23 may be replaced with the swing, and the reverse direction in S345A and S345B shown in FIG. 25 may be replaced with the swing. In FIG. 35A, it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative symbol swing display and the symbol notice effect are started. The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the swing display ends at timing T03. At the end of the swing display (timing T03), the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1). When the dynamic display is started, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), that is, an aura (backlight) image G of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the decorative symbol. The displayed notice effect is also started. Then, at the end of the swing display shown in FIG. 35 (A) (timing T03), as shown in FIG. 36 (D1), the variation in the forward direction of the decorative symbol at the reference position Ref is started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 35 (B), since the execution of the full screen notice effect is determined to be performed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 36 (B2), and is included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 36 (C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen notice effect in FIG. 36 (C2), that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 36 (D2). It has been changed to start the notice effect. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 36 (D2), not at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 36 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. Note that the decorative symbol swing display is executed without change, but it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 36 (B2) and (C2), so that it is visible to the player. Absent.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20 to FIG. 23, all symbol notice effects, symbol notice effects, and symbol reverse start display are selected by lottery. However, like the variation pattern shown in FIG. You may make it provide the fluctuation pattern (For example, it calls a special fluctuation pattern) provided with at least one among an effect, a symbol notice effect, and a symbol reverse direction start display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols. The description has been given assuming that the small symbol display area 5V is provided and the small symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the small symbol display area 5V is not provided, by displaying an effect image indicating a decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display may be executable. Even in this case, it is possible to arrange an effect image showing a character or the like as a specific effect image at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing an ornament design as an identification information image, and the display result in the variable display of the ornament design is In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at the position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design may be set as the stationary mode. Thereby, the misrecognition of the display result in the variable display of a decorative design can be prevented.

  Also, instead of variably displaying the effect image showing the decorative pattern, or by displaying the prepared effect image in an animation together with such variable display, it supports variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. When the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the display that can recognize the display result of the variable display is performed. The display result may be derived separately. In this way, it is possible to execute a related display for deriving a display result in relation to a determination result of whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and an overlapping position ahead of the effect image in this related display In the case where the specific effect image can be arranged, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode during the period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is executed, the effect image indicating the character used in the hold display change effect can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays as the specific effect image. Explained that there is. On the other hand, for example, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” and a different look-ahead notice effect different from this can be executed simultaneously over a plurality of variable displays, and characters used in part or all of the pre-reading notice effect are shown. The effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design. In this case, among the effect images used in the pre-reading notice effect, the effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the identification information image is used as the specific effect image, and a display result is derived whether the variable display is being performed. The display mode may be changed to the action mode or the static mode depending on whether the display mode is a period.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the specific effect image, the effect image indicating the character used in the hold display change effect has been described. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, display is started during variable display in which decorative display variable display is performed or before the start of variable display, and is continuously displayed even during a period in which the display result in variable display is derived. Any effect image may be used. For example, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state) It may be displayed so that it can also be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating. Alternatively, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is more than an effect image showing a decorative pattern. May also be displayed so as to be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side. In this way, as the specific effect image, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays is displayed so that it can be placed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. During the period in which the display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  The effect image indicating the character may be an effect image indicating, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. During variable display in which variable display of decorative symbols or the like is executed, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to the static mode by temporarily stopping the playback of the moving image.

  When the effect image showing one decorative design is the identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing a part of the one decorative design. It may be a thing, and may be arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps ahead rather than the production image which shows the whole of one decoration design. When an effect image showing a plurality of decorative symbols is an identification information image, the effect image that is a specific effect image is a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing some decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols It may be arranged at a position that overlaps the front side of the effect image showing all the decorative symbols.

  The type and part of the identification information image that can be arranged on the front side of the effect image serving as the specific effect image may be different according to at least one of the gaming state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability low base state), the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol is used regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a probabilistic symbol. An effect image that becomes a specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), it overlaps in front of the effect image showing the normal symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols. While it is possible to place an effect image that becomes a specific effect image at a position, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is not arranged at an overlapping position in front of an effect image that shows a probability variation pattern among a plurality of decorative symbols. May be. In this case, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the player's attention that the probability variation symbol is derived in the jackpot combination and the probability variation state continues is prevented from being hindered by the display of the specific effect image. This can improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol, regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol. It can be placed. On the other hand, when the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special production mode different from the normal production mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, a decorative design with a specific design number associated with a specific person is shown. The effect image that becomes the specific effect image may not be arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image. Thus, the specific effect image may be any image that can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that the display mode is set to the static mode for all the effect images to be the specific effect image during the period in which the display result in the variable display such as the decorative pattern to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, at least a part of the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image of the decorative design may be anything that can change the display mode to the static mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the display result of variable display such as a decorative design is derived, the display of an effect design that becomes a specific effect image arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design The embodiment has been described as being a stationary embodiment. On the other hand, when there is an effect image (backward arrangement image) arranged behind the effect image showing the decorative design, variable display of the decorative design is executed during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived. The rear arrangement image may be displayed in the same display manner as during variable display. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer that is assigned a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative design display layer shown in FIG. Also good. An effect image that is a background image is drawn on the background image layer. The Z value may be set so that the background image display layer is arranged on the rearmost side as viewed from the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image that becomes the background image arranged in the overlapping position or the non-overlapping position behind the effect image indicating the decorative design is variably displayed. It is good also as a display mode similar to the inside. As a result, an effect image that may cause misrecognition in the display result, such as a specific effect image, is set to a static state, while an effect image that does not cause misrecognition of the display result, such as a background image, is displayed in the same manner as during variable display By setting it as an aspect, the uncomfortable feeling with respect to the display of an effect image can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, during the variable display in which the decorative display variable display or the like is executed, the display mode of the effect image as the specific effect image is set as the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived. In the above description, it is assumed that the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged on the front side of the effect image that shows the decorative pattern that is the identification information image is the still image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image that becomes the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design The mode may be an idling mode different from the static mode. The idling mode may be a temporary stop mode that is set so that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from the action mode in the above-described embodiment within a range in which the display result is not misidentified.

  In addition, during variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is performed, for example, an effect image that informs a message “in design change” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. On the other hand, during the period in which the display result of the decorative symbol variable display or the like is derived, for example, an effect image informing a message of “design confirmed” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. In this way, depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the display result is derived, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific effect image by changing the content of the message that is notified as the character dialogue. Also good.

  When an effect image (character image) showing a character composed of a plurality of parts is displayed as the specific effect image, variable display of decorative symbols and the like is performed during a period in which the display result in variable display is derived. The specific effect image may be displayed in a different display mode.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured as described above. In such a configuration, based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening, the determination result as to whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state and the first state are changed. In relation to at least one of a determination result that the change mode of the time is one of a plurality of modes, or a determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state according to the passing situation of the game ball inside the variable winning device When the related effect for deriving the display result can be executed and the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image in the related display, the display result in the related display is derived in the period The display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it is described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is the second round number (for example, “7 A big hit gaming state having a first round number (for example, “15”) larger than “)” may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, a limit effect that restricts the hold display may be executed. For example, the limited effect is to display an effect image for display limitation in the display area of the image display device 5, and to perform translucent display, transparent display, or reduced display on the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display unit 5HL. In other words, the player may not be able to see or see part or all of the hold display by moving the production model (movable member) from the retracted state to the advanced state and concealing the reserved display in the advanced state. What is necessary is just to restrict | limit so that it may become difficult.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the process of S242 shown in FIG. 8 includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. In the above description, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled to the probability change state after the end. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning opening (second winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable prize-winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed during variable display of the special symbol. Is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs remain off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or maintains the light off state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating “−” (lighting) It may be configured such that other numbers and symbols are not displayed by repeating the non-display (off). As a special symbol variable display result, a symbol indicating “−” is not stopped and displayed as a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating “1” to “9” and other symbols. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the symbols that are not stopped as a variable display result are switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols are not displayed. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” and “probability” at which various decisions are made may be 0% (not decided) or 100% (not necessarily decided), such as 70:30, for example. So that the possibility of at least one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, the ratio of the determination result of any one of the plurality of determination results is higher than the ratio of the determination result of other determination results. It may be included to be 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. It will be higher than the ratio.

  In the above embodiment, one change pattern designation command is transmitted when starting variable display in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative design, and the like. Although an example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when the notification is made by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command before reaching reach such as presence / absence of quasi-continuous fluctuation, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. The command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode before the so-called second stop is transmitted. After the reach of the second command such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect (reach and reach) If not, a command indicating a variable display time or a variable display mode after the second stop may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on a variable display time derived from a combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after the first command has been sent and after a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be sent. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above, an example is shown in which the main side performs a prefetch determination and a command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side. However, a command indicating a random number value is transmitted from the main side and a prefetch determination is performed on the sub side. You may make it do.

  The present invention is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and that can be assigned a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or credits) for one game, and a variable display device (variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be individually identified) The display result of a plurality of reels, for example, is derived and displayed, and one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.) Is a gaming machine that can be generated. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine and the software for performing a predetermined process cooperate with each other to display the pachinko shown in the above embodiment. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part of the characteristics which the gaming machine 1 has may be provided. Specifically, the display result in the variable display of the identification information is derived in the configuration in which the specific effect can be executed at the overlapping position on the front side of the display surface on which the design of the identification information is variably displayed. In a period that overlaps in front of the identification information, the effect mode of the specific effect may be different from the effect mode during the variable display, such as a stationary mode or a temporary stop mode. .

  In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives Slot machines are not limited to those in which bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, but slot machines that set betting numbers using gaming balls as gaming values, or credits only as gaming values. It may be a full credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. It corresponds to the one to set. The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of medals and game balls, etc. The game value may be used together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting the number of bets using any one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals and game balls can be played by winning. Any of the types of gaming value may be paid out.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed this time are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the foregoing description and the following descriptions, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, as a gaming machine of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (for example, decorative designs) in a predetermined direction;
Notice effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, a full screen notice effect);
Control means (for example, a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), a solenoid, a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, a fourth lamp unit 90204, a fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP90123A, dedicated IC, etc.)
Output means for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B),
The output means receives a control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 49), and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T in FIG. 49) has elapsed (FIG. 49: timeout). Function)
When the control means outputs a control signal and continuously drives the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). Until the predetermined period T elapses),
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information is not visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize at the start of the variable display (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 executing the processes of steps S322A and S344A. 27 (B2), a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 29 (B2) or FIG.
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can start variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the process of step S322A is executed). After the elapse of the blackout effect execution period shown in FIG. 27 (B2), FIG. 29 (B2), or FIG. 31 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 performs FIG. 27 (D2), (E2), and FIG. 29 (D). , (E) or a variation of the decorative symbol in the forward direction is started as shown in FIG. 31 (D2)).

  According to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the malfunction of an electronic component can be avoided, an electronic component can be controlled more stably. Also, if the operation of the electronic component becomes unstable during the game and an unintended production or operation occurs, the player may feel discomfort or distrust, but the gaming machine can avoid malfunction of the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unintended effects and operations at a high level. This leads to the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, the gaming machine can avoid malfunctions of electronic components and has high operational reliability, and therefore can prevent the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand at a higher level.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine capable of operating electronic components provided in the gaming machine more stably,
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Control means (for example, a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), a solenoid, a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, a fourth lamp unit 90204, a fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP90123A, dedicated IC, etc.)
Output means for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B),
The output means receives a control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 49), and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T in FIG. 49) has elapsed (FIG. 49: timeout). Function)
When the control means outputs a control signal and continuously drives the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). A game machine characterized by outputting the control signal until a predetermined period T elapses).
Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine as another embodiment will be described. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of such a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board.

  A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “gaming machine”) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base) that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. Frame) 903. A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 37, the lower right position of the game area 9010). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light-emitting diodes), etc. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 9010 on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided as display means. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, the first special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are respectively supported. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, the effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game, the effect is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 905. The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this manner, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and the finalized effect symbol that is the result of the variable display is “derived display” (or simply “derived”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to stop display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided above the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B, the hold memory number (the number of the special figure hold memory) as the number of the variable storage hold memory information corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in an identifiable manner. Memory display is performed.

  Here, the variable display corresponding to the special game is suspended by the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Generated based on the start winning by entering. In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the dynamic display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  A first hold display area 905 </ b> D and a second hold display area 905 </ b> U are set in two places on the left and right sides in the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold display area 905D, the first special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of the first hold memory information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of the sphere (circular) hold images H. Is done. In the second hold display area 905U, the second special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of second hold memory information generated based on the second start winning is displayed by the number of images of the sphere (circular) hold image H. Is done.

  In the first hold display area 905D, the hold image H is displayed in such a manner that the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is executed. Each time, the hold image H at the right end corresponding to the first hold storage information is deleted, and a display is performed in which the remaining hold images H are shifted rightward one by one. In the second hold display area 905U, the hold image is displayed in such a manner that the hold image H increases on the right side whenever the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is executed. Each time the hold image H at the left end corresponding to the second hold storage information is erased, a display is performed in which the remaining hold images are shifted leftward one by one.

  The variation corresponding display corresponding to the variation display is shown during execution of the variation display corresponding to the retained display that has been erased (moved or shifted) from each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as “active image” or “active display”) AH is formed in the central portion of the hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 905D or the second hold display area 905U has been displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in such a manner that it can be identified that it corresponds to the reserved image. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 905.

  For the hold image H displayed in each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, the hold display mode for changing the hold display mode before the variable display of the target hold storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed.

  For example, the color of the reserved image H can be changed to blue, green, and red. When it is determined that the hold display mode change effect is to be executed at a predetermined rate, and the variable display result based on the hold storage information of the effect is a jackpot display result, the change after the change is made at a ratio of blue <green <red. When the color of the reserved image H is selected and determined (blue is the lowest selection ratio), on the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is an outlier display result, the color of the reserved image H after the change at a ratio of red <green <blue. Is selected (red is the lowest selection ratio). Thereby, the expectation degree to the big hit based on the color of the hold image H after the change when the hold display mode change effect is executed is set to have a ratio of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for jackpot based on the color of the hold image after the change.

  Also, for the active image AH, similarly to the reserved image H, the display mode change effect is executed, and the display mode such as the color or shape of the reserved image H is changed. The display mode change effect of such active display is also determined in a mode in which the degree of expectation for jackpot can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect, and the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined. The Note that the display mode change effect need not be executed for the active display.

  Below the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening. In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area 9010, there is provided an out port through which a game ball that has not entered any winning port is taken.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and an effect LED 909 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area 9010. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area 9010 of the pachinko gaming machine 901. . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 9010 is provided. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area 9010, a stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the effect display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B, the effect symbol variation display is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or changing the variation mode of the production symbol, performing a different production operation than before reaching the reach state. May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as “reach effect display” (or simply “reach effect”). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the effect LED 909, etc. before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability”, “hit reliability”, “expectation”, or “hit expectation”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. In addition, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the determined special symbol in the special figure game becomes a predetermined normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol pattern of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variation display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variation display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency to the normal variable winning ball device 906B is increased as described later. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  When a predetermined probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control after completion of the big hit gaming state. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. As with the time reduction control, the probability variation control is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time reduction number or 90 times different from the time reduction number) are executed after the big hit gaming state is finished. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  Various types of control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, a first lamp board 90210, and a second lamp board 90220 as shown in FIG. 38 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, and a relay board 9019 for relaying signals from the effect control board 9012. Etc. are also installed. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The effect control board 9012 is a sub-board control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and produces an effect display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by electrical components such as the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, the fifth lamp unit 90205, and the drive mechanism 90201. Is installed. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs display operations in the effect display device 905, audio output operations from the speakers 908L and 908R, the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, and the fourth lamp unit 90204. The fifth lamp unit 90205 has a function of performing a lighting / extinguishing operation and an operation of the drive mechanism 90201, that is, a function of controlling a production electric part and executing a predetermined presentation operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a first lamp driving unit 9014. The first lamp driving unit 9014 is configured to supply a driving signal to each LED of the first lamp unit 909 based on a control signal from the effect control board 9012 and turn on or off each LED separately. The first lamp driving unit 9014 and the first lamp unit 909 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 9019), or may be mounted on separate substrates.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a second lamp driving unit 9092, a third lamp driving unit 9093, a fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and a fifth lamp driving unit 9095. The second lamp driver 9092, the third lamp driver 9093, and the fourth lamp driver 9094 are mounted on the first lamp substrate 90210. The fifth lamp driver 9095 is mounted on the second lamp substrate 90220.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 supplies a driving signal to each LED 90202A (see FIG. 53) of the second lamp unit 90202 based on a control signal supplied from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019, and each LED 90202A is supplied. It is configured to be turned on or off separately. The third lamp driving unit 9093 supplies a driving signal to each LED of the third lamp unit 90203 based on a control signal supplied from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019 and the third lamp driving part 9093. The LEDs are configured to be turned on or off separately. The fourth lamp drive unit 9094 supplies a drive signal to each LED of the fourth lamp unit 90204 based on a control signal supplied from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019, and turns on or off each LED separately. It is configured to let you. The fifth lamp drive unit 9095 supplies a drive signal to each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205 based on a control signal supplied from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019 and the fourth lamp drive part 9094, and The LEDs are configured to be turned on or off separately.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an accessory driving unit 9091. The accessory driving unit 9091 is configured to supply a driving signal to a stepping motor or the like of the driving mechanism 90201 based on a control signal from the effect control board 9012 to operate the driving mechanism 90201. The accessory driving unit 9091 and the stepping motor in the driving mechanism 90201 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 9019), or may be mounted on different substrates.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 39A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39A, the command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 39B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an input / output port (I / O) 90105 are provided.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, on the main board 9011 side, a random value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation category The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 ′ for determining the normal display result and the random value MR5 ′ for determining the variation pattern are controlled so that they can be counted. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number used for controlling the progress of such a game is also referred to as “game random number”.

  The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 ′ to MR5 ′. For example, the CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of ~ MR5 'may be counted.

  FIG. 41 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern. In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 38 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011, Data constituting a table as shown in 41 is stored.

  FIG. 42 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 90130A shown in FIG. 42A and a second special figure display result decision table 90130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 904A. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1 '. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 904B. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1 '.

  FIG. 43 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines that the jackpot type is one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 90131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 904A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Depending on whether (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “Accuracy”.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 38 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 44, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 44 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 90151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 90151B, a general figure hold storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, a game A control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 90151A is a special figure game (not yet started) even though a game ball has passed (entered) through a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and a first start winning has occurred. The hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 904A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like is stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). To do.

  The second special figure storage unit 90151B is a special game that has not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates a reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like is stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). To do.

  Note that the first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 90151C stores hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 has been detected by the gate switch 9021. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 90151C associates with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 9041, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 ′ for use is stored as the hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”).

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 905 is arranged on the back side of the game board 902 so that it can be seen through the opening 902c formed in the game board 902. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 9051 is provided in the opening 902c of the game board 902. In addition, an effect unit 90300 is provided between the back of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905, and an effect control board 9012 has a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, provided in the effect unit 90300. A plurality of electronic components such as a sensor, a second lamp portion 90202, a third lamp portion 90203, and a fourth lamp portion 90204 are connected. In FIG. 38, illustrations of these electronic components other than the drive mechanism 90201 and the fifth lamp portion 90205 are omitted.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 (for example, based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120), and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 905 is displayed. The video signal is output, and the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 905. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90123A (see FIG. 47), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 90123B (see FIG. 47), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a display control command for designating an effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 905 to the display control unit 90123 in accordance with display control data included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 90123 uses the data stored in the CGROM or the like (storage unit) in accordance with the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120 to display a video signal specified by the display control command. Is output. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control (control based on the effect control pattern) of the effect control CPU 90120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 905. Become.

  An I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, from an output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the effect display device 905, a control signal (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a first lamp driver 9014 are transmitted. Control signal, the second lamp driving unit 9092 (or the third lamp driving unit 9093), the fourth lamp driving unit 9094 (or the fifth lamp driving unit 9095), and the accessory driving unit 9091 via the relay substrate 9019. The control signal transmitted to each is output. The control signal is supplied as a serial signal.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 38 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data configuring a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  For example, the ROM 90121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first hold display area 905D as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number MR6 ′ (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. Yes. Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 90121.

  Further, for example, the ROM 90121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second hold display area 905U as one of a plurality of types. Yes. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR6 ′ (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. Yes. Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 90121.

  The ROM 90121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a hold effect (also referred to as “action effect” or “hold change effect”). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 ′ (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold effect is to be executed, when the hold effect is not executed and when it is executed. Is assigned. In this embodiment, the hold effect is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area 905D to the notice mode, and the hold displayed in the second hold display area 905U. This is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display form of the display to the notice form. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the effect display device 905 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is a hold change gaze effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the effect display device 905 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  The ROM 90121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 ′ (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, for each of whether or not the active display change effect is executed. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In this embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing a special image into a notice mode. That is, the active display, the active display frame that surrounds the active display, information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame, etc.) are used as the notice mode. It is an effect to change (main notice effect). In the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect, the successful effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after executing the common effect, and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gas effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect does not affect the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905, or does not change the display mode of the special image, or acts on the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the mode of the special image to one of a plurality of modes, and a change of the special image that changes the mode of the second system. And the 2nd system | strain change effect changed to either of several aspects is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect corresponding to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. There are common production, success production, and failure production. The first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display in the special image (the active display displayed as the special image), and the second system change effect is the active display frame (special in the special image). The display mode of the active display frame displayed as an image is changed.

  Further, the ROM 90121 stores the first system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects. An effect execution timing determination table is stored. This first system change effect differs in the proportion of execution of the successful effect related to the first system change effect depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. In addition, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the first system change effect that are different from each other in the types of execution timings and the respective determination ratios that can be determined in the first system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. In addition, instead of a plurality of first system change effect execution timing determination tables, the ROM 90121 has one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all first system change effect execution timing determination tables. You may remember.

  Further, the ROM 90121 stores the second system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing of the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. This second system change effect differs in the proportion of execution of the successful effect related to the second system change effect depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. The ROM 90121 stores a plurality of second system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the second system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 90121. You may remember.

  The effect display device 905 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. A video signal supplied from the display control unit 90123 to the effect display device 905 via the I / O 90125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the effect display device 905.

  Note that the display control unit 90123 controls the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, and the like under the control of the effect control CPU 90120 in addition to the control of the effect display device 905. Here, details of a flow of drive control for the drive mechanism 90201 and light emission control for the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, and the like will be described later.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control board 9012 has a wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the effect display device 905 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction for the sound control board 9013. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the first lamp driving unit 9014, wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating a command for the relay board 9019, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action to the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the rendering unit 90300 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 45A is a front view showing the effect unit, and FIG. 45B is a rear view. 46A is a front view showing a state where the movable part is in the tilted position, and FIG. 46B is a front view showing a state where the movable part is in the standing position.

  As shown in FIGS. 37, 45, and 46, the effect unit 90300 is provided between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902, and is fixedly installed at a predetermined position. A base portion 90301, a movable portion 90302 which is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 90301, a tilt position where the movable portion 90302 is tilted laterally (see FIG. 46A), and a standing position where the vertical portion stands vertically (see FIG. 46A). 46B), and a first effect motor 90303 that is rotated between the first effect motor 90303 and the first effect motor 90303.

  A bearing hole 90310 is formed through the base portion 90301, and a guide groove 90311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 90310 is formed around the bearing hole 90310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 90310 on the back surface of the base portion 90301, a first effect motor 90303 for rotating the movable portion 90302 is fixed on the back surface, and the drive projecting forward through the base portion 90301. A turntable 90312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown). The first effect motor 90303 is a part of the drive mechanism 90201.

  A shaft member 90313 facing in the front-rear direction is protruded at a predetermined peripheral portion of the turntable 90312, and the lower end of the link member 90314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 90313 so as to be rotatable. Further, a detection piece 90315 is projected on the opposite side of the shaft member 90313 at the periphery of the turntable 90312, and the detection piece 90315 is detected by a position detection sensor 90316 provided below the turntable 90312. The effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilt position.

  The movable portion 90302 includes a rotating member 90320, a movable member 90321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 90320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 90320, and a movable member on the back side of the rotating member 90320. 90321 and a rack gear 90322 that moves integrally. The movable member 90321 can reciprocate between the first position on the rotation shaft 325 side and the second position farther from the rotation shaft 90325 than the first position with respect to the rotation member 90320.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position when the movable part 90302 is in the standing position. ing. Further, the movable member 90321 is at least partially retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 905 when in the first position, and at least partially overlaps the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 905 at the second position. (See FIG. 37).

  The rotation member 90320 is a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is inserted on the right side of the front surface from the rear side into the bearing hole 90310 so as to protrude from the left side of the rotation shaft 90325. A first guide shaft 90326 inserted into the guide groove 903111 from the rear side and a second guide shaft 90327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 90325 and inserted from the rear side are protruded. Yes.

  The upper end of the link member 90314 is pivotally supported at the tip of the second guide shaft 90327 that is inserted through the guide groove 903111 and protrudes toward the front surface side of the base portion 90301. That is, the turntable 9031 and the rotation member 90320 are connected via the link member 90314. In addition, a coil spring 90328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 90325 to urge the rotation member 90320 toward the standing position at all times.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 90326, a linear slide groove that guides the movable member 90321 in the left-right direction extends in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 is fixed above the slide groove on the front surface of the rotating member 90320, and the drive shaft that protrudes rearward through the base portion 90301 is fixed. A pinion gear 331 for operating the rack gear 90322 is fixed to the tip. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 90330. The second effect motor 90330 is a part of the drive mechanism 90201.

  A hook on which the left end of the tension spring 90323 for biasing the rack gear 90322 is engaged is provided on the rear surface on the left side of the rotating member 90320 so as to protrude rearward. Further, a position detection sensor 90333 for detecting a detection piece formed at the right end of the rack gear 90322 is provided on the right rear surface, and the detection piece is detected by the position detection sensor 90333, so that an effect control CPU 90120 is provided. Can specify that the movable member 90321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 90321 includes a disk-shaped light emitting portion 90321A and an attachment portion 90321B extending to the right from the light emitting portion 90321A. The light emitting portion 90321A is provided with a fifth lamp portion 90205 (not shown) inside, and can emit light forward. Further, two bosses are provided on the back surface of the mounting portion 90321B, and the bosses are inserted into the slide grooves of the rotating member 90320 and fixed to the rack gear 90322. A rack gear 90322 disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 90320 is integrated.

  The integrated movable member 90321 and rack gear 90322 are guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 90320 by inserting two bosses into the slide groove. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 90322, a hook 90335 is provided protruding rearward so that the right end of the tension spring 90323 that is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 is locked. That is, one end of the tension spring 90323 is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320 and the other end is locked to the hook 90335 of the rack gear 90322, so that the movable member 90321 is always directed to the second position side. Energize.

  The movable portion 90302 of the rendering unit 90300 configured as described above is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 46A in the initial driving state. Then, when the turntable 9031 is rotated clockwise around the front view by the first effect motor 90303, the second guide shaft 90327 is pulled downward by the link member 90314, so that the front view is centered on the rotation shaft 90325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. In addition, since the urging force of the coil spring 90328 acts when rotating from the tilt position to the standing position, the load on the first effect motor 90303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 90303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilt position.

[Details of light emission control and drive control]
Here, referring to FIG. 47, drive control for the drive mechanism 90201 and light emission to the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, the fifth lamp unit 90205, and the like. The flow of control will be described.

  The first lamp driving unit 9014 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into a driving signal for individually driving each LED of the first lamp unit 909 (hereinafter also referred to as a “conversion IC 9014B”). Say). A plurality of conversion ICs 9014B may be provided depending on the number of LEDs to be driven. A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9014B. The address may be set by the same method (described later in detail) as the conversion IC9093B described later. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9014B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9014B via the I / O 90125. Each LED of the first lamp unit 909 driven by the first lamp driving unit 9014 is, for example, each structure in the game area 9010 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) ) Function as a decorative LED provided around. Note that the effect control board 9012 and the board on which the first lamp driving unit 9014 is provided are electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 uses a control signal supplied as a serial signal from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019, and each driving signal for individually driving each LED 90202A (see FIG. 53) of the second lamp part 90202. Serial-parallel conversion IC9092B (hereinafter also referred to as "conversion IC9092B"). A unique address is set in the conversion IC9092B. The address may be set by the same method (described later in detail) as the serial / parallel conversion IC9093B described later. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9092B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9092B via the I / O 90125 and the relay board 9019. The effect control board 9012 and the relay board 9019, and the relay board 9019 and the first lamp board 90210 are electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  The third lamp driving unit 9093 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into a driving signal for individually driving each LED of the third lamp unit 90203 (hereinafter also referred to as “conversion IC 9093B”). Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC9093B (details will be described later).

  The control signal includes a part for designating an address. The conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are connected to each other, and the conversion IC 9092B specifies that the address specified by the supplied control signal is not the same as its own address (here, the address specifies the conversion IC 9093B). In this case, the control signal is supplied as it is to the conversion IC9093B. In this way, the conversion IC 9093B receives the control signal via the conversion IC 9092B that is a conversion IC located in the preceding stage. With such a configuration, the control signal is accurately supplied to the conversion IC having an address designated by the control signal. Control signals supplied to the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are supplied from the effect control CPU 90120 to the conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driving unit 9092 via the I / O 90125 and the relay board 9019.

  The fourth lamp drive unit 9094 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into a drive signal for individually driving each LED of the fourth lamp unit 90204 (hereinafter also referred to as “conversion IC 9094B”). Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9094B. Note that the address may be set by a method similar to that of the conversion IC9093B or the like. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9094B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9094B via the I / O 90125 and the relay board 9019. Each LED of the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, and the fourth lamp unit 90204 driven by the second lamp driving unit 9092, the third lamp driving unit 9093, and the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, respectively, It functions as a part of the effect LED 909 provided in the periphery of 9010. Therefore, the first lamp substrate 90210 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area 9010.

  The fifth lamp driving unit 9095 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into a driving signal for individually driving each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205 (hereinafter also referred to as “conversion IC 9095B”). Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9095B. Note that the address may be set by a method similar to that of the conversion IC9093B or the like. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9095B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9094B via the I / O 90125 and the relay board 9019. Each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205 driven by the fifth lamp driving unit 9095 is provided in the light emitting unit 90321A shown in FIG. The second lamp substrate 90220 itself is also provided in the light emitting unit 90321A, and a control signal from the fourth lamp driving unit 9094 is supplied through the wiring 90361 shown in FIG.

  What control signals VDP90123A outputs to conversion IC9014B, conversion IC9092B, and conversion IC9094B depends on lighting data stored in CGROM 90123B (data indicating LED lighting pattern, which LED is to be lit, etc.) It is specified. The lighting data is compressed and stored in the CGROM 90123B. This is because VDP90123A has a specification that uses compressed data. As a result, the data can be handled efficiently. And it can suppress that data amount becomes large.

  Under the control of the effect control CPU 90120, the VDP 90123A supplies a control signal in accordance with the lighting data to the conversion IC 9014B, the conversion IC 9092B, and the conversion IC 9094B (supplying a control signal specifying the address of the supply destination IC). . The conversion IC 9014B, the conversion IC 9092B, and the conversion IC 9094B include a latch circuit, a shift register, and the like. Among the control signals that specify their own addresses, data signals other than the portions that specify the addresses (here, high or low for each bit) 24 bit data signal) is converted into each drive signal (1-bit data signal (High signal or Low signal)), etc., and the serial control signal is converted into a parallel drive signal. The converted parallel drive signals are simultaneously supplied to the respective LEDs. By sequentially repeating such an operation, the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, the second lamp unit 90204 in a mode (light emission color, light emission period) according to the lighting data. The five lamp unit 90205 emits light.

  Note that the LED 90202A (and the LED 90202B) of the second lamp unit includes RGB LEDs as described later. The same applies to the LEDs of other lamp units. In addition, the drive signal is generated corresponding to each RGB LED, and is individually input to each RGB LED. In this embodiment, the LED is turned on (emits light) by the Low signal. Since the drive signal is repeatedly output every time the control signal is supplied, the supply period of the Low signal becomes longer when the Low signal is output continuously. If the Low signal supply period (the number of times the Low signal is output) is long, the light emission period of the LED also becomes long, and the LED appears to emit light brightly. In this way, the drive signal that is repeatedly output is PWM-controlled by the number of Low signals, and the light emission luminance of each LED (the light emission luminance of each color) is gradation controlled by the light emission period (that is, the Low signal period) by PWM control. Is done. For this reason, each LED 90202A can individually emit color light in accordance with a repeatedly supplied control signal (various colors can be expressed by adjusting the luminance (light emission period) of each LED of RGB. )

  The accessory driving unit 9091 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into each driving signal for individually driving each stepping motor (usually a plurality) included in the driving mechanism 90201, and hereinafter referred to as “conversion”. IC9091B ") and a drive driver 9091C for supplying a drive current corresponding to the drive signal to the drive mechanism 90201. A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9091B. The address may be set by the same method (described later in detail) as the conversion IC9093B described later. The drive mechanism 90201 is the first effect motor 90303 or the second effect motor 90330 shown in FIG. The accessory drive unit 9091 itself is provided on the game board 902, and a motor control signal from the drive driver 9091C of the accessory drive unit 9091 is sent to the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 via wiring. Supplied. Note that the effect control board 9012 and the board on which the accessory driving unit 9091 is provided are electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  What control signal is output by the effect control CPU 90120 depends on the drive data included in the effect control pattern stored in the ROM 90121 (how the motor of the drive mechanism 90201 is moved, and which motor is moved) Etc.). The lighting data and driving data are stored in the ROM 90121 without being compressed. This is because the performance control CPU 90120 is designed to use uncompressed data. As a result, the data can be handled efficiently.

  The effect control CPU 90120 supplies a control signal according to the drive data to the conversion IC 9091B via the relay board 9019. The conversion IC 9091B includes a latch circuit, a shift register, and the like. Among the control signals for specifying its own address, a data signal other than the portion for specifying the address (here, 24-bit data indicating High or Low for each bit) Signal) is separated into each drive signal (1-bit data signal (High signal or Low signal)), and the serial control signal is converted into a parallel drive signal and converted into a drive target (each stepping motor). The parallel drive signals are supplied simultaneously. By sequentially repeating such operations, the drive mechanism 90201 operates in a manner according to the drive data, and drives the movable member 90321.

  Note that audio output via the audio control board 9013 is performed by the effect control CPU 90120, but may be performed by the display control unit 90123. Also, under the control of the effect control CPU 90120, the VDP 90123A generates a video signal according to the image data stored in the CGROM 90123B, supplies it to the effect display device 905, and displays the effect image. The image data is compressed and stored in the CGROM 90123B. This is because VDP90123A has a specification that uses compressed data. As a result, the data can be handled efficiently. And it can suppress that data amount becomes large.

  The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the second lamp driver 9092 via the relay board 9019 and supplies power to the second lamp part 90202 via the second lamp driver 9092. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VCC for the conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driving unit 9092, outputs VCL1 for the LED 90202A of the second lamp unit 90202, and outputs VCL2 for the LED 90202B. These are supplied on a separate line to each of the conversion IC 9092B and the LEDs 90202A, 90202B (ie, power is supplied on separate supply lines). The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the first lamp driving unit 9014 via the relay board 9019 and also supplies power to the first lamp part 909 via the first lamp driving part 9014. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VCC for the conversion IC 9014B of the first lamp driving unit 9014, and outputs VCL1 for the LED of the first lamp unit 909. These are supplied on separate lines to the conversion IC 9014B and the LED, respectively. The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the third lamp driving unit 9093, the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and the fifth lamp driving unit 9095 in the same manner as the second lamp driving unit 9092.

  In addition, each VCC and each VCL1 (or each VCL2) supplied to each conversion IC or each LED may be generated independently from each other and supplied by separate supply lines, or at least a part of which is a common voltage. You may make it.

  The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the accessory driving unit 9091 via the relay board 9019. The accessory driving unit 9091 supplies power to the drive mechanism 90201 based on the power from the effect control board 9012 to operate the drive mechanism 90201 (power may be supplied in the form of a drive signal). For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VDD as a voltage necessary for driving the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 90201, and the VDD is finally supplied to the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 90201.

  The effect control board 9012 outputs 5 V (VCC) as a voltage necessary for driving the conversion IC, and the VCC is supplied to the conversion IC 9091B of the accessory driving unit 9091. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs 5V (VCC) to the conversion IC 9091B as a voltage necessary for driving the drive mechanism 90201.

  Note that a detection signal from a rotational position sensor provided in the drive mechanism 90201 (a signal that detects the initial position of the motor that moves the movable member 90321) is fed back to the CPU 90120 for effect control.

  Note that a plurality of serial / parallel conversion ICs (conversion ICs 9014B, 9091B to 9095B) may be provided according to the number of drive targets (control targets) (stepping motors, LEDs, etc.) and the number of terminals (for example, an accessory) In addition to the conversion IC 9091B in the driving unit 9091, one or more other conversion ICs of the same type are provided). In this case, a plurality of conversion ICs (the same type of conversion ICs) are connected in series, and a unique address is set for each. The effect control CPU 90120 and the VDP 90123A output a control signal designating the address of the conversion IC connected to the drive target. When the control signal is output, the first conversion IC among the serially connected conversion ICs first receives the control signal. When the control signal specifies the address of the first conversion IC, the first conversion IC converts the control signal into a parallel drive signal and outputs the parallel drive signal. When the control signal does not specify the address of the first conversion IC (when the subsequent conversion IC is specified), the first conversion IC directly transfers the control signal to the conversion IC connected second. Output. When the control signal from the first conversion IC designates its own address, the conversion IC connected secondly converts the control signal into a parallel drive signal and outputs it. If the address is not specified, the control signal is supplied to the next connected conversion IC as described above. In this way, a control signal can be transmitted to a desired conversion IC. Note that when there are a plurality of conversion ICs 9092B, a control signal designating the address of the conversion IC 9093B passes through each of the plurality of conversion ICs 9092B and is supplied to the conversion IC 9093B.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the audio control board 9013 to output sound, or the first control via the display control unit 90123 and the first lamp driving unit 9014. The lamp unit 909 is turned on / off, the second lamp unit 90202 is turned on / off via the display control unit 90123 and the second lamp driving unit 9092, and the display control unit 90123 and the third lamp driving unit 9093 are used. The third lamp unit 90203 is turned on / off, the fourth lamp unit 90204 is turned on / off via the display control unit 90123 and the fourth lamp drive unit 9094, and the display control unit 90123 and the fifth lamp drive unit 9095 are turned on. The fifth lamp unit 90205 is turned on / off via a driving mechanism 902 via the accessory driving unit 9091. 1 is operated, move the movable member 90321, and or to display an effect image to the display area of the effect display device 905 via the display control unit 90123 executes various effects of.

  Next, the output method (timing) of the control signal output from the effect control board 9012 will be described. As described above, the conversion ICs 9091 </ b> B to 9095 </ b> B output drive signals for driving the electronic components (drive mechanism 90201, LED, etc.) to be driven based on the control signals output from the effect control board 9012. As a method for continuously driving the electronic component, for example, when the conversion IC receives a control signal (ON signal) for outputting a drive signal, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Until the control signal (OFF signal) is input, a method of continuously outputting the drive signal is conceivable.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart of the control signal and the drive signal. Referring to FIG. 48, when the control signal (ON signal) is output at time t1 and the conversion IC receives the control signal, the conversion IC continues to output the LED drive signal. In this case, the LED maintains the lighting state. As described above, the LED drive signal is output as a PWM signal, but is simplified for the sake of explanation in FIG.

  However, according to the above configuration, for example, in a state where each conversion IC receives an input of a control signal (ON signal) and drives an electronic component, thereafter, the wiring for connecting the effect control board 9012 and each conversion IC When a part is disconnected or short-circuited, each conversion IC cannot receive a control signal (OFF signal), and thus the electronic component is continuously driven unintentionally. Therefore, the electronic component may be damaged (for example, the motor of the drive mechanism 90201 may be damaged).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as the conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B, conversion ICs having a function (time-out function) capable of stopping the output of the drive signal after the elapse of a predetermined period after receiving the input of the control signal are used. Here, a method for continuously driving an electronic component when using a conversion IC having a timeout function will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating another example of the timing chart of the control signal and the drive signal. Referring to FIG. 49, when a control signal (ON signal) is output from effect control board 9012 at time t1, and conversion IC receives the input of the control signal, conversion IC outputs an LED drive signal. Next, the conversion IC stops outputting the drive signal after a predetermined period T (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (time t2) after receiving the control signal (for example, time t1). Note that the timing at which the control signal is output from the effect control board 9012 and the timing at which the conversion IC receives the input of the control signal are so small as to be negligible. Therefore, the LED is lit from time t1 to time t2, but the LED is turned off until the conversion IC receives an input of a control signal (time t3).

  Next, when a control signal (ON signal) is output from the effect control board 9012 at time t3 and the conversion IC receives the input of the control signal, the conversion IC outputs an LED drive signal. Then, in order to keep the LED in a lit state (that is, to drive the LED continuously over the predetermined period T), the effect control board 9012 is predetermined from time t3 when the control signal is output. The control signal is output again at time t4 before the period T elapses. Since the conversion IC receives the control signal at time t4 before the predetermined period T elapses from time t3 when the control signal is input, the conversion IC continues output without stopping the output of the drive signal. Similarly, the effect control board 9012 outputs the next control signal at time t6 (time t7, time t8) before the predetermined period T has elapsed from time t5 (time t6, time t7) when the previous control signal was output. Therefore, the LED can be kept on after the time t3.

  In the example of FIG. 49, each time interval (for example, time t3 to time t4, time t4 to time t5, etc.) from when the effect control board 9012 outputs the control signal to when the next control signal is output is set. Although the same configuration has been described, the configuration is not limited thereto. Specifically, when the LED is continuously driven, the effect control board 9012 satisfies the condition that the control signal is output again after a predetermined period T elapses after the control signal is output. If this is the case, the time intervals may not be the same.

  As described above, in order to continuously drive an electronic component when using a conversion IC having a timeout function, it is important that the output of the control signal (ON signal) to the conversion IC is not interrupted. Become. Therefore, the effect control board 9012 outputs an output for complementary output of the control signal in preparation for the case where the effect control CPU 90120 for outputting the control signal or the VDP 90123A cannot output the control signal due to a hang-up or the like. A circuit (or software program) may be provided. For example, this output circuit has a function of continuously outputting a control signal stored in the output buffer of the RAM 90122.

  Note that this timeout function may be configured to be enabled or disabled. Specifically, when a predetermined terminal of each conversion IC is grounded, the timeout function is set to be valid, and when the predetermined terminal is grounded via a resistor, the function is set to be invalid. . Note that the configuration is not limited to hardware and set in this way. For example, a command from the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120, VDP 90123A) (time-out function valid / invalid setting command, for example, Each conversion IC may be configured to enable or disable the function according to whether the input of the terminal is H level or L level.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating still another example of the timing chart of the control signal and the drive signal. Referring to FIG. 50, from time t1 to time t4, the control signal (ON signal) is output from VDP 90123A at regular intervals, and thus the LED remains on during this period. Here, it is assumed that after the VDP 90123A outputs the control signal at time t4, it hangs up and cannot output the control signal. In this case, the output circuit continues to output the control signal (ON signal) remaining in the output buffer as a buffer signal after time t5. Specifically, the output circuit outputs the buffer signal again after a predetermined period T elapses after the buffer signal is output. Thereby, even if VDP90123A which mainly outputs a control signal hangs up, the lighting state of LED can be maintained. Note that the output circuit has a function of detecting that the VDP 90123A is hung up.

  Next, a method of setting the output waveform shape of a signal when a control signal and a clock signal are supplied (output) from one conversion IC to another conversion IC will be described. As described above, the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9095B that are not directly connected to the relay substrate 9019 receive the control signal and the clock signal via the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9094B, respectively.

  Here, the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate 90210), but the conversion IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are provided on different substrates (first lamp substrate 90210 and second lamp substrate 90220), respectively. Is provided. That is, the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are electrically connected within the same substrate, and the conversion IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are electrically connected outside the substrate. Specifically, the first lamp substrate 90210 and the second lamp substrate 90220 are connected by a wiring member such as a cable. When the conversion ICs are connected within the substrate, the attenuation rate of the waveform is smaller and the external noise resistance is higher than when the conversion ICs are connected outside the substrate (via a cable or the like). Therefore, in order to reduce unnecessary radiation noise, the waveform shape is changed between the in-board connection and the off-board connection as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 is an image diagram of an output waveform of a signal. Referring to FIG. 51, each conversion IC outputs an output waveform in the case of outputting the received control signal and clock signal to another conversion IC, as a normal slew rate (FIG. 51 (a)) or a low slew rate ( The setting can be made as shown in FIG. Each conversion IC is provided with a setting terminal SE (see FIGS. 53 and 55) for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal to be output and the through output of the control signal to be output. When the setting terminal SE is set to L (see FIG. 53), the through output of the clock signal and the control signal is set to the normal slew rate output, and the setting terminal SE is set to H (high) (see FIG. 55). Then, the through output of the clock signal and the control signal is set to a low slew rate output.

  The normal slew rate output waveform is an output waveform in which the waveform rises in a manner of change equal to or greater than that of the received signals (control signal and clock signal). Specifically, when the normal slew rate is set, the slope (the amount of voltage change per unit time) of the rising portion of the signal output to the other conversion IC is equal to the rising portion of the received signal. More than the slope. Also, the low slew rate output waveform is an output waveform in which the waveform rises in a mode of change more gradual than the normal slew rate output waveform. Specifically, when the low slew rate is set, the slope of the rising portion of the signal output to another conversion IC is less than the slope of the rising portion of the received signal.

  The output waveform of the high slew rate is abruptly switched from the OFF signal to the ON signal and from the ON signal to the OFF signal, and a spike-like current flows through the conversion IC or the like at this moment. Such a rapid change in current causes an induced voltage to generate noise according to a parasitic inductance of a circuit such as a conversion IC. On the other hand, the low slew rate output waveform has a slower switching from the OFF signal to the ON signal and from the ON signal to the OFF signal than the high slew rate output waveform, and the current flowing through the conversion IC or the like can be reduced at this moment. . For this reason, the low slew rate output waveform can suppress the generation of noise compared to the high slew rate output waveform. can do. However, when the signal is affected by noise from the outside, the ON signal may not be recognized by the conversion IC or the like in the low slew rate output waveform due to the influence of the noise. However, in the case of a high slew rate output waveform, it is more likely that an ON signal can be recognized by a conversion IC or the like even if it is affected by noise, compared to a low slew rate output waveform. That is, the low slew rate output waveform has a feature that it is difficult to radiate noise to the outside, but is weak to noise from the outside. On the other hand, the high slew rate output waveform tends to radiate noise to the outside, but has a feature that it is resistant to noise from the outside.

  Therefore, when the circuit is connected like the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B, and the waveform attenuation is small and the external noise resistance is high, the conversion IC 9092B that outputs a control signal to the conversion IC 9093B outputs a low slew rate waveform. By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of high frequency noise generated due to the rise of the signal. On the other hand, when the conversion IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are connected outside the substrate and the waveform is greatly attenuated and easily affected by external noise, the conversion IC 9094B that outputs a control signal to the conversion IC 9095B outputs a normal slew rate waveform. By setting so as to increase the resistance to external noise.

  Here, each conversion IC may have a function of compensating the output waveform for the input control signal, clock signal, and data input from the DATA / I terminal. That is, generally, the clock signal and control signal output from the production control board 9012 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but transmission loss due to wiring until reaching each conversion IC is large. In some cases, a clock signal or control signal having a waveform that is corrupted from the original rectangular wave may be input. Therefore, the conversion IC does not simply output the input clock signal or control signal as it is, but instead converts the input clock signal or control signal in the state of a waveform that has collapsed from the original rectangular wave to the original rectangular wave. It is also possible to provide a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by setting the setting terminal SE, the waveform is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output is closer to the original rectangular wave. A signal can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, when the rising or falling slope is large, the amount of voltage change instantaneously increases, and there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase.

  On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the setting terminal SE, the output is compensated for a waveform having a smaller rising or falling slope, so that when compared with a normal slew rate output, Although it is weak against the influence of external noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the conversion IC by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the conversion IC.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. The output setting may be such that the input waveform is output as it is without compensation of the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform is used as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  Even when the conversion ICs are connected to each other within the board, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of branching and outputting to a plurality of conversion ICs, the conversion IC receiving the input of the control signal is set to output a normal slew rate waveform. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the connection between the conversion ICs.

  52A, conversion IC 9092B is provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate 90210) as conversion IC 9093B and conversion IC 9094B. However, unlike the example of FIG. 47, the conversion IC 9092B is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B in the substrate. More specifically, the conversion IC 9092B branches the control signal and supplies it to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B. For this reason, the waveform of the control signal output from the conversion IC 9092B is likely to be attenuated due to the branch loss, so that it is easily affected by external noise. Therefore, in such a case, the tolerance of external noise is increased by setting the conversion IC 9092B so as to output a waveform of a normal slew rate.

  Referring to FIG. 52B, conversion IC 9092B is provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate) as conversion IC 9093B, and conversion IC 9094B is provided on third lamp substrate 230. Here, the conversion IC 9092B is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9093B inside the substrate, but is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9094B outside the substrate. More specifically, as in the case of FIG. 52A, the conversion IC 9092B branches the control signal and supplies it to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B. Therefore, in this case as well, by setting the conversion IC 9092B to output a normal slew rate waveform, the noise immunity from the outside is increased.

  In FIG. 52A, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the conversion IC 9092B is connected to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B is connected to the conversion IC 9093B (a configuration in which each conversion IC is connected in series), the control is performed. Since the signal waveform is difficult to attenuate and is not easily affected by external noise, the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B may be set to output a low slew rate waveform.

  Next, specific circuit configuration examples of the second lamp driving unit 9092 and the second lamp unit 90202 will be described. As described above, the second lamp driving unit 9092 includes the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B, and FIG. 53 shows an example of these circuit configurations.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 includes a connector 9017A and is connected to the outside by the connector 9017A. The connector 9017A has 8 terminals. The first terminal and the fourth terminal are grounded. The second terminal is connected to an external data line to which a control signal is supplied. The third terminal is connected to an external clock line to which a clock signal for synchronizing the control signal is supplied. Each line is connected to an output terminal of a control signal and a clock signal (synchronization signal supplied from the effect control board 9012) in the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driving unit 9092. The fifth terminal and the sixth terminal are connected to an external power supply line (a line via the relay board 9019 or a line from the effect control board 9012), and a voltage of VDD (12V) is applied. The That is, two terminals (four terminals in total because a terminal to be grounded is also necessary) are used for power supply. Usually, the current value of the current that can be passed through the connection terminal is determined (for example, up to 1A), but the current value of the current that drives the LED 90202A of the second lamp unit 90202 is large (for example, 1.5A). ) The current value of the current for driving the LED 90202A is secured by securing two terminals. The seventh terminal is connected to an external power supply line to which VCC (voltage for driving the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B and the like) is supplied, and the eighth terminal is grounded. VCL and VCC are supplied by different systems and are not shared (that is, a power supply line for supplying power to LED 90202A and a power supply line for supplying power to serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B are separated). . Therefore, even if a large current flows through the LED 90202A, VCL is not affected. Therefore, the resistance value of the resistor R2 can be made smaller than that of the resistor R1, and the light emission luminance of the LED 90202A can be increased. Of course, VCL and VCC may be shared without being supplied by separate systems.

  The fifth terminal and the sixth terminal are connected to the power supply line L1. In the power supply line L1, VDD (12V) supplied via the 5th and 6th terminals is stepped down to VCC (5V) by the power supply IC 541C and is used as VCL1 in the second lamp driving unit 9092 (such as a serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B). And the output supplied to the LED 90202A and the output supplied to the LED 90202B as VCL2 without being stepped down by the power supply IC 541C. That is, the second lamp portion 90202 can be provided with LEDs (LED 90202A and LED 90202B) that are driven with different voltages by separating outputs supplied from the power supply IC 541C.

Here, the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 53 uses a serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B in which an LED 90202A driven by VCL1 (5V) and an LED 90202B driven by VCL2 (12V) are used in combination. Therefore, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B is connected to an ESD (Electro-Static Discharge) protection terminal SCR with VCL2 (12V) of a high drive voltage. As a result, in the circuit configuration, a voltage of 12 V or more can be passed through the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B and the ESD protection terminal SCR, so that circuit damage due to high voltage due to electrostatic discharge can be avoided.

  A noise filter may be provided at the output of the VCL1 of the power supply IC 541C to remove noise. Further, the output of VCL1 of the power supply IC 541C is connected to one end of the capacitor C1, and the other end of the capacitor C1 is grounded. With such a circuit configuration, the potential of VCL1 is stabilized.

  A noise filter may be provided at the output of the VCL2 of the power supply IC 541C to remove noise. Further, the output of VCL2 of the power supply IC 541C is connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is grounded. With such a circuit configuration, the potential of VCL2 is stabilized.

  A noise filter may be provided on the VCC output to remove noise. In the middle of the output of VCC, one end of the capacitor C3 is connected, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is grounded. With such a circuit configuration, the VCC potential is stabilized.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 includes a serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B. The DATA terminal and the CLK terminal of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B are connected to the second terminal and the third terminal of the connector 9017A by the data line L4 and the clock line L5, respectively. As a result, the control signal is input from the second terminal of the connector 9017A to the DATA terminal of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B via the data line L4, and the clock signal is serially transmitted from the third terminal of the connector 9017A via the clock line L5. • Input to CLK terminal of parallel conversion IC9092B. In the middle of each of the data line L4 and the clock line L5, amplifiers A1 and A2 are respectively connected, and pull-up resistors R5 and R6 are respectively connected. Accordingly, the high signal or the low signal as the control signal and the clock signal can be accurately transmitted to the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B. A protection circuit HK is also connected to the data line L4 and the clock line L5. The protection circuit HK is a circuit that protects the second lamp driving unit 9092 from electrostatic discharge, and includes a protection element S1 including a diode array and the like. VCL2 (12V) is also applied to the protective element S1. The protection circuit HK also includes a capacitor C5 connected between the VCL2 and the ground and connected to the protection element S1.

  Terminals ADR0 to ADR4 of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B are terminals for setting an address of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B. Here, since all the terminals ADR0 to ADR4 are grounded, “00000” is set as the address. By connecting at least one of ADR0 to ADR4 to an LDO terminal or the like, a portion corresponding to the terminal is set to “1”. In this way, an address is set (for example, when the terminal ADR0 is connected to an LDO terminal or the like, the address is “10000”).

  A drive signal obtained by converting the control signal is output from the terminals Q0 to Q23 of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B. The terminals Q0 to Q20 are connected to the cathodes of the RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202A. The anodes of the RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202A are connected to the output of the power supply IC 541C, and VCL1 is applied thereto. For this reason, when a Low signal is output as a drive signal, a current flows through the LED connected to the terminal from which the Low signal is output, and the LED emits light. The terminals Q21 to Q23 are connected to the cathodes of the RGB LEDs provided in the LED 90202B. The anodes of the RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202B are connected to the output of the power supply IC 541C, and VCL2 is applied thereto. For this reason, when a Low signal is output as a drive signal, a current flows through the LED connected to the terminal from which the Low signal is output, and the LED emits light.

  The terminal LDO and the terminal DVDD of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B output a predetermined voltage. The terminal LDO and the terminal DVDD are grounded via capacitors C5 and C6. The terminal R_Iref is grounded through the resistor R1 and is connected to the capacitors C5 and C6. In the serial-parallel conversion IC 9092B used in this embodiment, the current that flows in the LED when a Low signal is output as a drive signal to at least one of the terminals Q0 to Q23 (when a plurality of LEDs emit light, a plurality of LEDs emit light). The total current flowing through each of the LEDs) flows from the terminal R_Iref to the ground via the resistor R1. The current value of the current (current flowing through each LED) depends on the resistance value of the resistor R1. Conventionally, the terminal R_Iref has been directly grounded. However, when the terminal R_Iref is directly grounded, the LED is driven at a constant current using the internal resistance of the serial / parallel conversion IC9092B as a reference resistance. Therefore, when the output current is fixed at 20 mA, the variation of the internal resistance causes about 30%. There was a possibility that an error of the current value of about a degree occurred and the light emission of the LED was sparse. Therefore, the resistor R1 is connected to the terminal R_Iref, and the LED is driven with a constant current using the resistor R1 as a reference resistor. Therefore, when the output current is fixed at 20 mA, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is changed to about 3 % Error can be suppressed, and the light emission of the LED can be stabilized.

  Each terminal VDD of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B is connected to the output of the seventh terminal of the connector 9017A, and VCC1 is applied thereto. The terminal VREF is grounded via the capacitor C7. Each terminal VDD is also grounded via capacitors C8 to C11 (this stabilizes the voltage applied to each terminal VDD). The terminal GND is grounded.

  The terminal DATA0 is connected to the terminal DATA of the next conversion IC (for example, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9093B of the third lamp driving unit 9093 shown in FIG. 47) connected in series along the control signal supply route. A signal (when the address does not specify the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B) is supplied to the next conversion IC. The terminal CLK is connected to the terminal CLK of the next conversion IC, and a clock signal is supplied to the next conversion IC. Other terminals are grounded.

  The serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B operates according to the clock signal supplied from the terminal CLK and supplies the clock signal from the terminal CLK0 to the next conversion IC. When the control signal supplied from the terminal DATA designates its own address, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B latches the 24-bit information (High signal or Low signal) indicated by the control signal bit by bit, Information latched from Q0 to Q23 is output as a drive signal (High signal or Low signal). Further, since a drive signal is output for each control signal that is repeatedly supplied, the light emission luminance of the RGB LEDs is adjusted according to the number of times the Low signal is supplied (the light emission luminance is controlled by PWM control). Note that the LED is turned off when the High signal is supplied. The light emission color and light emission luminance of each LED 90202A are adjusted according to the light emission luminance of RGB and the presence or absence of light emission. By adjusting a predetermined control signal, each LED 90202A can be made to emit light or emit light with a desired emission color and emission luminance. The current that flows through the LED 90202A during light emission (the sum of the currents that flow through each LED) flows to the ground via the resistor R1. Note that since the current value of the current flowing through the LED 90202A depends on the resistor R1, the current value decreases as the resistor R1 increases, and the light emission luminance of the LED 90202A decreases. In this embodiment, since the power supply lines of VCL1 and VCL2 are shared, the potential of VCL2 may not be stable when a large current flows through LED 90202A (particularly, it may decrease). Therefore, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is set large (here, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is 6 kΩ, but other resistance values may be used), and the light emission luminance of the LED 90202A (by one drive signal) Instead of lowering the light emission luminance when light is emitted), the current flowing through the LED 90202A may be reduced to stabilize the potential of VCL1 (this makes it possible to stabilize the operation of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B). In this embodiment, the output of the power supply line L1 is branched by the power supply IC 541C, the capacitor C1 is connected to the power supply line that supplies VCL1, and the capacitor C2 is connected to the power supply line that supplies VCL2. Thus, the potentials of VCL1 and VCL2 can be stabilized (in particular, the potential of VCL1 can be stabilized and the operation of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B can be stabilized).

  Further, in the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B, the change timings of the drive signals output from the terminals Q0 to Q23 are dispersed using the built-in CR oscillation circuit. Specifically, FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining phase separation of drive signals output by serial / parallel conversion. Since the built-in CR oscillation circuit shown in FIG. 54 transmits a 6 MHz clock signal, the drive signal is separated into six layers as a 1 MHz PWM clock signal and output from 24 channels (terminals Q0 to Q23) of the serial / parallel conversion IC9092B. Dividing into 6 groups of terminals, 1 group and 4ch, the change timing of the drive signal is distributed.

  Group 1 is a PWM clock signal of a drive signal output from terminals Q0 to Q3, Group 2 is a PWM clock signal of a drive signal output from terminals Q4 to Q7, and Group 3 is a PWM of a drive signal output from terminals Q8 to Q11. The group 4 outputs the clock signal from the terminals Q12 to Q15, the group 5 outputs from the terminals Q20 to Q23, the group 5 outputs from the terminals Q20 to Q23, the group 5 outputs from the terminals Q20 to Q23. Each corresponds to the PWM clock signal of the drive signal. The PWM clock signals of each group are shifted in period by 1 MHz. When converting the serial signal to the parallel signal, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B can shift the output period of the parallel signal in units of groups to suppress radio wave radiation (noise generation) from the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B to the outside. IC with built-in functions.

  However, when driving a motor or the like, if the cycle is shifted during motor rotation, the control accuracy decreases, and therefore it is necessary to connect only to terminals (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) belonging to the same cycle. On the other hand, a device that does not involve an operation such as an LED is less affected by the period shift than the drive control of a motor or the like, and can be used freely without limiting the terminals of the group to be used. Further, if the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B is not 12ch (terminals Q0 to Q23) but 12ch (terminals Q0 to Q11), one group may be divided into 3 groups with 4ch.

  Next, a circuit configuration example of the accessory driving unit 9091 is shown in FIG. The accessory driving unit 9091 has a circuit configuration shown in FIG. The circuit configuration of FIG. 55 is basically the same as the circuit configuration of FIG. The same serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B and serial / parallel conversion IC 9091B can be used, and a drive driver 9091C and a drive mechanism (for example, a motor) 201 are used instead of the LED 90202A. 53 and FIG. 55, the connectors connected to the outside are the same. That is, the accessory driving unit 9091 includes a connector 9017A and is connected to the outside by the connector 9017A. The connector 9017A has 8 terminals. The fifth terminal and the sixth terminal are connected to an external power supply line to which VCL (voltage for driving the drive driver 9091C and the like) is supplied, and the seventh terminal is connected to VCC (serial / parallel conversion IC 9091B and the like). Voltage) is connected to an external power supply line, and the eighth terminal is grounded. In FIG. 55, VCL and VCC are supplied by different systems and are not shared (that is, a power supply line for supplying power to the drive driver 9091C and a power supply line for supplying power to the serial / parallel conversion IC 9091B are not provided. Are separate). Therefore, even if a large current flows through the drive driver 9091C, the VCL is not affected. Therefore, the resistance value of the resistor R2 can be made smaller than that of the resistor R1, and the amount of current supplied to the drive driver 9091C can be increased.

  The accessory drive unit 9091 converts the control signal supplied as a serial signal by the serial / parallel conversion IC 9091B into each drive signal for individually driving each stepping motor (usually a plurality) of the drive mechanism 90201, and the drive signal The drive driver 9091C supplies an output voltage for driving the drive mechanism 90201 to the drive mechanism 90201.

  Next, operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the main board 9011, when the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S9015 shown in FIG. 56 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S90101).

Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described.
In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 9012. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S9072; No), the processing of S9072 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 is generated separately from a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among the input ports included in the I / O 90125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in S9072 (S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S9073), and command analysis processing is executed (S9074). In the command analysis processing executed in S9074, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read out and then read out. Settings and control corresponding to the production control command are performed.

  After the command analysis process is executed in S9074, an effect control process process is executed (S9075). In the effect control process of S9075, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 905, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the first lamp unit 909, and a drive operation in the effect model. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 are performed.

  The effect random number update process is executed following the effect control process of S9075 (S9076), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random numbers used for effect control. Numeric data is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to S9072. The various random number values updated in S9076 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 ′ to MR12 ′, in addition to a random number value for determining a definite symbol to be described later.

  In S9074 of FIG. 58, the process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 59 is executed as the command analysis process. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S9075 of FIG. 58 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 60, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a winning effect determining process (S90150).

  First, a determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first hold display area 905D will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. Note that the ROM 90121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 61A shows a pending selection that is selected when the variation category is “PA1 ′ (shortening / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 ′ (non-reach (loss))”. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a display mode determination table. FIG. 61B shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 ′ (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types. (H-TBL2). FIG. 61 (C) shows the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 ′ (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 61 (D) shows setting of the display mode determination ratio of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 ′ (super reach β (loss))” among the above seven types. 61E is an example (H-TBL4), and FIG.61E shows a hold display based on a hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is "PB3 '(normal reach (big hit))" among the above seven types. 61 is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the display ratio of the display mode of Fig. 61. Fig. 61 (F) is selected when the variation category is "PB4 '(super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types. 61 is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display based on the hold display mode determination table that is displayed. Richi is beta (big hit)) Configuration example of determining the proportion of hold display of the display mode by hold display mode decision table is selected when "a (H-TBL7).

  According to FIG. 61, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G). The types of display modes to be determined are the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, It is roughly divided into three types, the second specific display mode. The normal display mode is “sphere”. The first specific display mode is a display mode of an icon shape using “characters” (also referred to as a character icon). The second specific display mode is a display mode of an icon shape (also referred to as “character icon”) using a “character” composed of “human character”. An example of a “sphere” is shown in FIG. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. Examples of “character icons” are shown in FIGS. Icon-like hold displays such as “character icons” and “character icons” are used for production as hold displays of a specific display mode of a type different from the normal display mode of a general “sphere”.

  The hold display of “sphere” is displayed as “red sphere”, “yellow sphere”, “blue sphere”, “white sphere” in each table of FIG. In the “sphere” hold display, for example, in the case of reach, red and yellow are more easily determined than in the case of non-reach, and blue and white (initial color) are less likely to be determined. In addition, in the case of reaching, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is more difficult to determine blue and white than in the case of non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) when becoming a hot reach (for example, super reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 41 and 61, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “lost”, and blue and white are determined. It is hard to be done. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation level for a hot performance and a big hit than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, the expectation that a hot performance will be executed and the expectation that will be a big hit are high in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white.

  The display mode of the character icon hold display is “character” in each table of FIG. When it is determined to be “character”, the newly added hold display is set as the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the hold as described above corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed. Either the display mode change effect or the variation corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

  The display mode of the character icon hold display is displayed as “character character” in each table of FIG. When it is determined as “character”, the newly added hold display appears as the character icon display mode (normal display mode), and the above-described hold display corresponds to the hold storage in which the hold display is performed. Either the display mode change effect or the variation corresponding display mode change effect can be executed.

  According to the table of FIG. 61, as understood with reference to the determination ratio of the random value MR6 ′, the display with the character icon or the display with the character icon is selected as the fluctuation display with the high expectation degree of the jackpot is selected. The rate that is done is high. In this example, the higher the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit, the higher the proportion of the on-hold display with the character icon selected than the on-hold display with the character icon.

  After the winning effect determination process of S90150 shown in FIG. 60 is executed, any of the following processes of S90170 to 90177 is performed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191, for example. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process of S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 9011 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 905. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbol on the effect display device 905. Active to shift the first hold display or the second hold display, or to determine the final decorative pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. A process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effects of various effects (for example, active display as a main notice effect) It includes a process for determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The effect process during variable display in S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of decorative symbols during variable display of decorative symbols) are performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the effect display device 905 and displays it on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 9013. Then, various effect controls such as a control for outputting a production sound from the speaker 8 and a control for turning on / off / flashing the first lamp unit 909 by outputting an electrical decoration signal to the first lamp driving unit 9014 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, corresponding to the fact that an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the effect control pattern, or that a symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even without using an effect control command from the main board 9011, the variable display result can be determined by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the effect control board 9012 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received. Then, when the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit effect processing. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting medium effect process of S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and the variable of S90172 Similar to the effect processing during display, various effect controls in the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, or the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. .

  The small hit end effect process in S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and the variable of S90172 Similar to the effect processing during display, various effects control at the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in S90172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, or the like. Further, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the production process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process of S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and performs the variable display effect in S90172. Similar to the processing, various kinds of effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S90171 of FIG. 60 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (S90522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (S90522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the designated fluctuation pattern is changed. Non-reach variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (ie, “PA1′-1,” “PA2′-1,” “PA2′-2,” “PA2′-3, FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not (S90523).

  If it is determined in S90523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S90523; Yes), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination is determined (S90524). As an example, in the process of S90524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L in the display area of the effect display device 905 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 5R in the display area of the effect display device 905 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. , Etc., the medium confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 905 is determined. Note that in the process of S90524, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to a case where a change symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in S90523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (S90523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (S90525). As an example, in the process of S90525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, etc., symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the effect display device 905 among the confirmed decorative symbols, etc. The decorative design with the same number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 905 is determined.

  When it is determined in S90522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (S90522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display result is “ It is determined whether it is a “small hit” or other cases (S90526). When it is determined to be “accuracy” or “small hit” (S90526; Yes), for example, a chance to release, a final decorative symbol that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or “small hit” Is determined (S90527). In this case, numerical data indicating random numbers for chance eye determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the above, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined.

  When it is determined in S90526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “surprise accuracy” or “small hit” (S90526; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (S90528). As an example, in the process of S90528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determination symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the production control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and then a predetermined value stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. The symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the screen of the effect display device 905 by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table The decorative design with the same number is determined. At this time, a determination may be made that a different decorative symbol is a final decorative symbol depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit.

  If it is specified that the time is not short in the process of S90513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 59 (S90155: NO), after executing any of the processes of S90524, S90525, S90527, or S90528, the pending digest process is executed. (S90531). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the variation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the variation is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first hold display area 905D An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first hold display area 905D is displayed). . More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 uses an effect control pattern in which the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first hold display area 905D is moved to the active display area AHA to display the active display. The right end of the first hold display area 905D is set as a pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123, etc. In the active display area AHA, an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in is displayed. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  In the processing of S90531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first hold display area 905D, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the other hold display in the first hold display area. If there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second hold display area 905U, the other hold display is shifted in the second hold display area 905U.

  After executing the process of S90531, an effect execution setting process is executed (S90532). The effect execution setting process (S90532) includes a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change when the hold display is determined to be “sphere”. The process of determining the type of active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing, and the results of these processes A process for setting (or resetting) the production control pattern based on this is included.

  Further, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), when the newly appearing hold display is determined to be an icon shape display form such as a character icon or a character icon, a display form change effect execution timing selection process, It further includes a display mode change effect type selection process, an icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, a process for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on these processing results, and the like.

  The display mode change effect execution timing selection process is the execution timing of the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) corresponding to the hold storage in which the character icon or the icon shape of the character icon is held on hold. This is a process for selecting and determining. As shown in FIGS. 63B, 63C, etc., the execution timing of such hold display is, for example, during hold display after the first hold display shift after the hold display corresponding to the hold storage appears. And the timing during active display corresponding to the reserved storage are selected and determined.

  The display mode change effect type selection process selects and determines the type of the “character” or “character” icon shape hold display or active display display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect). It is processing. As shown in FIGS. 63D and 63E, the type of display mode change effect is selected and determined as one of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

  In the change mode selection process, the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-corresponding display mode change effect) of the display of the “character” or “character” icon shape display is selected and determined. It is processing. As shown in FIGS. 63 (F) to 63 (M) and the like, the display modes of the character icon display mode change effect (holding display mode change effect or change corresponding display mode change effect) are “no change” and “opportunity” display. And “Intense heat” are selected and determined. The display mode change effect of the character icon (the hold display mode change effect or the variation-corresponding display mode change effect) is selected and determined from “no change”, “two people” display, and “three people” display. The

  After executing the processing of S90532, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (S90533). As an example, in the processing of S90533, execution setting of “single notification effect” that immediately notifies (definitely notifies) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission may be performed. . Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp or the like. Moreover, in the process of S90533, you may set so that the production | presentation of a predetermined aspect may be performed, for example for liveliness, regardless of whether a variable display result turns into "big hit". For example, the first lamp unit 909 may be set so as to execute an effect such that the first lamp unit 909 emits light.

  After executing the processing of S90533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (S90534). Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the effect display device 905 is executed (S90535). For example, the effect display device includes transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of S90532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The sound output from the speaker 8 can be performed by transmitting to the sound control board 9013 the setting sound for starting the change of the decorative pattern on the screen 905, or transmitting the effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern. For starting the light emission in the first lamp unit 909 by transmitting to the first lamp driving unit 9014 a setting for starting or transmitting an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern. Set up.

  After the processing of S90535 is executed, the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 90194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 90194B is digested (S90536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is the smallest of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game. A command (first set entry prize designation command) stored in an area corresponding to a buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command is deleted while deleting a command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the received command buffer at the second start winning prize. While deleting the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands, The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  In the processing of S90536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first prefetching advance notice buffer 90194C or the second prefetching advance notice buffer 90194D provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S90537), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S90532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining the type of active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the on-hold selection effect pattern table. In particular, FIG. 63A shows a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. 63B to 63M show a display mode change effect execution timing selection process and a display mode change effect type selection when the hold display is determined to be a display mode of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. It is various data tables used for the icon production | presentation setting process which performs a process and a change mode selection process.

  Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 63 (A), when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, whether or not the active display change effect is executed, and the type of active display change effect (which It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | generation aspect of an active display change effect when performing an active display change effect). In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR7 ′ (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect are “executed” and “not executed”. Are assigned at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In addition, in the “execution present” of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number for determination MR7 ′ (not shown) is “first system change effect”, Each of the “second system change effect” and the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is assigned at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. The first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame, The target which acts by the 2nd system change production differs.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. The variation pattern 1′-X represents the variation pattern PA1′-1 shown in FIG. 41, and the variation pattern PA2′-X represents the variation patterns PA2′-1, PA2′-2, PA2′− shown in FIG. 3, the variation pattern PA3′-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3′-1 and PA3′-2 shown in FIG. 41, and the variation pattern PA4 ′ represents the variation pattern PA4 ′ shown in FIG. -1, PA4'-2, PA4'-3, or PA4'-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5′-X, PB4′-X, and PB5′-X.

  Here, returning to FIG. 62 again, the variable display start setting process will be further described. In the effect execution setting process (S90532), the effect control CPU 90120 has a character icon or a character icon hold display selected by the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 61 as the newly appearing hold display. In some cases, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 63B to 63M, a process for realizing a display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display as shown in FIG. 63 (B) or 63 (C), after the hold display is shifted in accordance with the hold on the variable display to be started, As described above, a setting process for executing the display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is performed.

  On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display in FIG. 63 (B) or 63 (C), the active display corresponding to the hold storage to be the effect object. Until the time is executed, the data specifying the content of the effect selected and determined as described above is associated with the data of the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A corresponding to the reserved memory to be effected. In addition to storing active display change effect designation data for designating the execution of the display mode change effect, the display mode change data provided in the RAM 90122 is used for specifying the effect content selected and determined as described above. Store in the effect storage area. Then, in step 90905 of the effect execution setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display to be started is a variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect target specified by the active display change effect designation data. Display mode change during active display based on the data specifying the content of the effect stored in the display mode change effect storage area when it is determined that the display is a variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the effect target. The production is executed.

  By executing the processing as described above, in the performance execution setting process (S90532), when the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon and the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode Production execution setting process (S90532) during the first hold display after the appearance of the hold display to be changed or during the active display when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is executed. The display mode change effect is executed based on the effect setting.

  Further, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table and the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the hold display displayed as “sphere”. In the case of executing the active display change effect, whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to 'and the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command The active display change effect to be executed is determined from among the plurality of active display change effect effects.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect. When it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect” is determined. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 64 (A) shows an example in which the display mode change is executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display. FIG. 64B shows an example in which the display mode change is not executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display.

  FIG. 65 shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 65 (A) shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 65 (B) shows a character selection table.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 65 (A), the character icon consisting of the characters “Caution” in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears, and the effect selections of FIGS. 63 (F) to (I). A character icon made up of characters of “opportunity” that can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the table, and the second change at the time of the display mode change effect by the effect selection table of FIGS. A character icon made up of characters of “hot” that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for the jackpot of these character icons has a relationship of “attention” <“opportunity” <“extreme heat”.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 65 (B), the “one person” character icon in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears and the effect selection tables of FIGS. 63 (J) to (M). It can be selected as the second change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icons of “two people” that can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect and the effect selection table of FIGS. The “three” character icons are set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for the jackpot for these character icons has a relationship of “1 person” <“2 people” <“3 people”.

  Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting the effect patterns of the first change effect to the fourth change effect described above is set will be described. The change effect pattern table is stored in the RAM 90122.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a change effect pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, for each type of the first change effect to the fourth change effect, the effect pattern when the change effect is selected during the hold display and the change effect during the active display are selected. The production pattern of the time is shown. Each of the selection for performing the change effect during the on-hold display and the selection for performing the change effect during the active display is performed using the data tables of FIGS. 63 (B) to 63 (E).

  Next, an effect display example when a character icon is displayed as a hold display will be described. FIG. 67 is a display screen diagram illustrating an effect display example when the character icon 9061 is displayed as the hold display on the effect display device 905.

  When a new first hold memory is generated and a hold display mode based on a character icon is determined using a hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 61, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A). A display for causing the hold display by the character icon 9061 of “caution” display which is a normal display mode to appear in the first hold display area 905D is displayed.

  The change effect timing is selected and determined as “pending display” in the character hold display change effect timing selection table in FIG. 63 (B), and the change effect type is selected in the character hold change effect type selection table in FIG. 63 (D). 67 is selected and determined as “first change effect”, during the hold display after the first hold shift after the hold display by the character icon 9061 on which the “caution” is displayed appears in FIG. 67 (B). As shown, a first change effect in which the blue arrow acts downward on the hold display by the character icon 9061 of “caution” display is executed as the display mode change effect.

  When the display after the first change effect is selected and determined to be “Intense heat” display by the change selection table during the first change effect hold display of FIG. 63 (F), as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the first After the execution of the display mode change effect by the change effect, the hold display by the character icon 9061 is changed from the “caution” display to the “hot” display in the first hold display area 905D. Thus, when the hold display by the character icon 9061 changes, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot on the hold display can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an effect display example when a character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 68 is a display screen diagram showing an effect display example of the active display after the character icon 9062 is displayed as the hold display on the effect display device 905.

  When a new first hold memory is generated and the hold display mode based on the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 61, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A). A display for causing the hold display by the character icon 9062 of “one person” display, which is the normal display mode, to appear in the first hold display area 905D is displayed. In the state of FIG. 68A, after the on-hold display by the character icon 9062 called “one person” appears and is displayed, the previous on-hold display is digested, and “1” is displayed as the on-hold display for the next variable display. A state in which the hold display is performed by the character icon 9062 of “person” display is shown.

  Then, the change effect timing is selected and determined as “active display” by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 63 (C), and is changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 63 (E). When the effect type is selected and determined as “fourth change effect”, the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 9062 displayed as “one person” as shown in FIG. 68B is displayed in the active display area. In AHA, a character icon 9062 of “one person” is displayed. As shown in FIG. 68B, a red arrow is displayed next to the active display by the character icon 9062 of “one person” as a display mode change effect. A fourth change effect acting from the direction is executed.

  Then, when the display after the third change effect is selected and determined to be “three people” display by the fourth change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 63 (M), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), After execution of the change effect by the fourth change effect, the hold display by the character icon 9062 is changed from the “one person” display to the “three person” display in the active display area AHA. In this way, when the active display by the character icon 9062 changes, the player's expectation for the big hit of the current variable display can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an icon effect is included in the effect execution setting process (S90532), and an icon effect for setting an effect when the character icon and the character icon are displayed on hold using the various data tables of FIGS. 63 (B) to 63 (M). The setting process will be described.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing icon effect setting processing. About the process for setting the effect when performing the hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 63B to 63M, the above-described effect execution setting process (S90532). In FIG. 69, in order to clarify the flow of setting the effect when performing the hold display or the active display with the character icon and the character icon in FIG. Processing contents will be described.

  In the table of FIG. 61, the icon effect setting process is executed when the character icon or the character icon hold display mode is selected and determined. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the following process. First, the random value MR10 ′ is extracted, and the change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 63 (B) or FIG. Using either “on hold display” or “active display” is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change effect (S90700).

  Next, the random value MR11 ′ is extracted and shown in FIG. 63 (D) or 63 (E), depending on the change effect execution timing of “pending display” or “active display” selected and determined in S90700. Using the change effect type selection table, for “pending display”, “first change effect” or “second change effect” is selected and determined, and for “active display”, “third change effect” or The “fourth change effect” is selected and determined (S90701).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the “first change effect” has been selected and determined in S90701 (S90702). If it is determined in S90702 that the “first change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S90700 (S90703). When it is determined in S90703 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the first change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 ′ is extracted, and the first change effect shown in FIG. Using the change display table during hold display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), the display change after the first change effect, “No change”, “Opportunity” display, “Intense heat” display The mode is selected and determined (S90704), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90703 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is used to execute the first change effect during active display. 'Is extracted and “No change”, “Opportunity” display, “Intense heat” display is used according to the display result (big hit, loss) using the first change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 63 (G). Is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change effect (S90705), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S90701 that the “first change effect” has not been selected and determined in S90701, it is determined whether or not the “second change effect” has been selected and determined in S90701 (S90706). If it is determined in S90706 that the “second change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S90700 (S90707).

  When it is determined in S90707 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the second change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 ′ is extracted, and the second change effect shown in FIG. Using the change display table during hold display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), “No change”, “Opportunity” display, “Intense heat” display, display change after the second change effect The mode is selected and determined (S90708), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90707 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the second change effect during active display. ′ Is extracted, and “No change”, “Opportunity” display, “Intense heat” display is displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss) using the second change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 63 (I). Is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change effect (S90709), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S90706 that the “second change effect” has not been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not the “third change effect” has been selected and determined in S90701 (S90710). If it is determined in S90710 that the “third change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S90700 (S90711). When it is determined in S90711 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the third change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 ′ is extracted, and the third change effect shown in FIG. Using the change display table during hold display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), “No change”, “2 people” display, or “3 people” display is displayed after the third change effect. The change mode is selected and determined (S90712), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90711 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the third change effect during active display. 'Is extracted, using the third change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 63 (K), “no change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” depending on the display result (big hit, lose) One of the displays is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change effect (S90713), and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S90701 that the “third change effect” is not selected and determined in S90701, it is determined whether or not the “fourth change effect” is selected and determined in S90701 (S90714). If it is determined in S90714 that the “fourth change effect” has been selected and determined, it is determined whether or not “pending display” is selected and determined in S90700 (S90715). When it is determined in S90715 that “pending display” is selected and determined, in order to execute the fourth change effect during hold display, the random value MR12 ′ is extracted, and the fourth change effect shown in FIG. Using the change display table during hold display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), “No change”, “2 people” display, or “3 people” display is displayed after the fourth change effect. The change mode is selected and determined (S90716), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90715 that “pending display” is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the fourth change effect during active display. ′ Is extracted, and “No change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” are displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss) using the fourth change effect active display change selection table of FIG. 63 (M). One of the displays is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change effect (S90717), and the process is terminated.

  By the icon effect setting process described above, an effect using a character icon or a character icon is set, and the variable display effect process (S90172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, FIG. Such a hold display mode change effect and a variation corresponding display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 68 are executed.

[Modification of display mode change effect by icon display]
Next, various modified examples of the effect of active display as described above will be described.

  (A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 (B) to (M), FIG. 67, and FIG. 68, a total of 2 times of one timing during the hold display and one timing during the active display. The example which enabled the display mode change effect which changes the display mode of a character icon display or a character icon display at any one timing among the two timings was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 70, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect example in which the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display is selected from a plurality of timings. FIG. 70A shows a first hold display area 905D and an active display area AHA for explaining the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 70 (B) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 63 (B). FIG. 70 (C) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 63 (C).

  Referring to FIG. 70 (A), in this modification, character icon display is performed at any one of a total of three timings, ie, two timings during hold display and one timing during active display. Alternatively, it is possible to execute a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display. The two display mode change effect execution timings during the hold display are, for example, the number “2” in the hold display areas numbered “1” to “4” in the first hold display area 905D. When the hold display is made in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the second old hold memory is displayed (during the first hold display), the first old hold memory numbered “1” is displayed. There are two cases when the hold display is made in the display area where the corresponding hold display is made (during the second hold display).

  In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one timing selected from the three timings during the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. In this modification, when the hold display is performed with the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. In the table of FIG. 70 (B), as in the table of FIG. 63 (B), the ratio at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected during active display is set lower than during suspension display. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. In the table of FIG. 70 (C), as in the table of FIG. 63 (C), the ratio of the character icon display mode change being selected during the hold display is set lower than during the active display. With this setting, in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, if it does in this way, the production will be more varied, and the fun of the production can be further improved.

  Further, when the hold display is performed with the character icon display, the closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears, the higher the selected ratio is set. Thereby, when the hold display is performed in the character icon display, when the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the first hold display, and when the display mode change is executed at the timing during the second hold display. The selection ratio of “no change”, “opportunity” display, and “extreme heat” display may be different (for example, the higher the selection ratio, the lower the selection ratio of “extreme heat” display).

  In this modification, for example, a part (two) of four hold display areas is targeted, and the display mode change effect can be executed during the hold display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed during the hold display for all the hold display areas. For active display, the period during which active display is continued is divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the plurality of periods is a period during which the display mode change effect can be executed, and any of the periods is changed in the display mode. It is good also as selection as a period which performs production. If it does in this way, the production will be more varied and the fun of the production can be further improved.

  The timing of executing the display mode change effect includes those described as the embodiment and the modification described above, and among the plurality of timings during the holding display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target holding storage. Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

  (B) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, when the hold display is a character icon, an example in which the display mode of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect is shown. When it is an icon, the example in which the display mode of the character icon is changed by the display mode change effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to a character icon or the like by a display mode change effect at a predetermined rate. You may produce the effect which changes to another icon. Further, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon may be changed to another icon such as a character icon by a display mode change effect at a predetermined rate. If such an effect is given, the player can be noticed that a change in the display mode of the specific display (display mode of the icon) or a change in the type of specific display (the type of icon) occurs. Interest can be further improved.

  In this modification, for example, an icon display that can be displayed at the appearance of the hold display, such as a character icon and a character icon, may be used as the icon after the change. A specific icon display may be used.

  (C) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 64 to 70 can be executed during either the hold display or the active display is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executable at both the hold display time and the active display timing.

  (D) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which display mode change effects as shown in FIGS. 64 to 70 can be executed at any one timing during the hold display period and the active display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed stepwise at a plurality of times during the hold display period and the active display period. In this case, for example, the icon display change mode may be selected in a plurality of stages, and the icon display may be selected and set so that the icon display can be changed in stages at a plurality of times.

  (E) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display or the active display that is the target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display or active display that is the target of the display mode change effect may be any display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, “sphere”), and is not limited to the icon shape. . Therefore, the hold display or the active display hold display that is the target of the display form change effect is a display form (for example, different in size, color, etc.) that is different from the display form such as the shape and color that the normal display acquires even if it is a sphere Are different).

  (F) When there are a plurality of types of hold display or active display (for example, icon display types selected during hold appearance display) that are targets of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. Among a plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, there may be a type in which no display mode change effect is executed during the hold display period, and no display mode change effect is executed during the active display period. Types that are not included may be included.

  (G) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, when the start display (on hold storage), the display of the hold display, which is the execution target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. Although an example of selecting and determining only the display mode at the time of appearance display has been shown, during such a start winning (at the time of hold storage), the hold display or active display as shown in FIGS. 63 (F) to (M) The final display mode (no change, “opportunity”, “extreme heat”, “2 people”, “3 people”, etc.) after the on-hold display mode change effect may be selected and determined.

  (H) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the display mode of the hold display that is the execution target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. The character icon is determined, but the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may be selected and determined as in the “sphere” described above. That is, the display mode of the hold display, which is the execution target of the display mode change effect, may be capable of selecting and determining a combination of the icon shape and the icon color. The same icon may be set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the selected color.

  (I) The display mode change effect of the icon display described above may be executed on condition that the reserved number is three or four or more.

  (J) The icon display during the hold display and the icon display during the active display need not be the same icon display. For example, the icon display during hold display is displayed in a first color such as white, while the icon display during active display is displayed in a second color such as black, The display mode of the icon display during active display may be partially different. In addition, as for the character icons, the characters of the icons that are on hold display are displayed in Mincho style, and the characters of the icons that are currently active display are displayed in block style. . As for the character icons, the number of persons may be the same, but the gender may be different, for example, the icon displayed on hold is displayed as a male character and the icon displayed as active is displayed as a female character.

  (K) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed by the same display means (effect display device 905) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the hold display and the active display are different display means. (For example, the hold display is displayed on the first effect display device and the active display is displayed on the second effect display device).

  (L) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas is shown. However, the display is not limited to this, and the display may be switched using the same display area. Good (for example, the active display area is not displayed when the hold display is displayed, and the hold display area is not displayed when the active display is displayed).

  (M) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode change effect presentation mode (type) may be different depending on the display mode of the icon display (character icon, character icon). For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (effect mode) of icon display may be provided and the effect may be executed.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an effect example using the movable member 90321 will be described. FIG. 71 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 72 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the story reach effect is executed.

  Battle reach effects and story reach effects are executed by the CPU 90120 for effect control. Battle reach production and story reach production are multiple types of special reach production (supermarkets) that have a higher percentage of selections that result in jackpot display results compared to normal reach production called normal reach. It is a specific super reach production included in the “reach production”. For example, the reach production executed in the super reach α (big hit) of the fluctuation category “PB4 ′” shown in FIG. 41 is the battle reach production, and is executed in the super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category of the fluctuation category “PB5 ′”. Reach production is a story reach production. Furthermore, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, as a relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. Note that the expectation of jackpot between the battle reach production and the story reach production may be reversed.

  Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 905 and the effect operation of the movable member 90321 are combined.

  The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 71 will be described. In the variation display of the effect symbols, the effect symbol change display is started simultaneously in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, “left”, “right” In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as “medium”, the variation display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and 905C, and finally the effect symbols are stopped in all the effect symbol display areas. Thus, when the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the effect symbols change display is started all at once, when the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L and 905R are stopped as shown in FIG. It becomes a state. The variation display until the timing of reaching the reach state is executed in a normal variation display effect mode that does not differ between normal reach and super reach. The normal reach and the super reach differ in the production mode after reaching the reach state.

  When the battle reach effect is executed as the reach effect, the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are reduced as shown in FIG. A small symbol display format is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9053 indicating the characters “battle reach” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the battle reach effect is executed.

  In battle reach production, as shown in FIGS. 71 (C) to (E), a video in which a teammate character 9061a (player's teammate side) and an enemy character 9062a (player's teammate) battle each other (battle). A battle effect that displays an image (effect including the output of the sound effect during the battle and the music sound during the battle) is executed.

  In the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 9061a wins is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (E), and further, in FIGS. 71 (D) and 71 (E). As shown in the figure, an image that superimposes the particle effect image 9071 is displayed on the victory effect image, and the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position, and the victory effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the change display result becomes the deviated display result, a defeat effect that displays an image in which the teammate character 9061a loses is performed, and a particle effect image 9071 as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) and (E). And the effect using the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the battle effect, after the display of the appearance of the teammate character 9061a and the enemy character 9062a as shown in FIG. 71C, the teammate character 9061a and the enemy character are displayed as shown in FIG. 71D. A moving image in which 9062a battles (battles) is displayed. For example, FIG. 71D shows a scene in which the teammate character 9061a attacks the enemy character 9062a. As shown in FIG. 71 (D), in the battle effect, in the scene where the teammate character 9061a attacks (scene that suggests victory), the particle effect image as the effect display is displayed in the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 905. 9071 is made to appear, and a particle effect effect is displayed that is superimposed on the victory effect display. When the teammate character 9061a wins, as shown in FIG. 71E, a victory effect is displayed in which an image that can identify that the teammate character 9061a has defeated the enemy character 9062a and the teammate character 9061a has won is displayed. Is done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position, so that the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 905 is obtained. Is done. The appearing movable member 90321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 71E, when the movable member 90321 appears due to the movable body operation effect and moves to the standing position, the number of appearances of the particle effect image 9071 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 90321. Thus, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 9071 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect that is executed using the particle effect image 9071 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 9071 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71F, the jackpot display result (same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect symbol that has been displayed in the small symbol format, and a message image 55 indicating “Congratulations” is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach effect (having a big hit). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the effect symbol for which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes the display error result, the defeat effect described above is executed, and the display error result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format. The original size and the original position are restored and displayed.

  Next, the story reach effect shown in FIG. 72 will be described. After the display of the effect symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), after the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped and reach a reach state, the reach effect is obtained. When the story reach effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 72B, the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are reduced. In a small symbol display format, it is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9054A showing the letters “first half of story” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach effect is executed.

  The story reach effect is an effect in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story like a specific story is displayed, for example. In this example, the story reach production has a two-part configuration of a first half and a second half. Story reach production is when the story is not completed and the production ends and the display result is derived and displayed, and when the story continues to the end and the production is completed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed. There is.

  When the variable display result is an outlier display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half. An effect that continues up to may be executed.

  In addition, the story reach production may be set so that the performance is selected so that the person who has performed until the end has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the case where the production is finished in the first half . Further, the story reach production may be a one-part configuration that is not divided into a first half and a second half.

  After message image 9054A is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to “first half of story” is displayed. When “first half of story” is finished and “second half of story” is subsequently executed, a message image 9054B with the letters “second half of story” is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. The Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is continuously executed. Note that in the story reach effect, an image notifying that it is a story reach effect such as the message images 9054A and 9054B may not be displayed.

  After message image 9054B is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to “second half of story” is displayed. In the story reach effect, when the variable display result is a jackpot display result, a flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on a black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 72D as an image display that can specify that the story is complete. As shown in FIG. 72E, the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position, and a story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result becomes a non-display result, a story incomplete effect that can specify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 72 (E). The effect using the flame effect image 9073 and the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 72D, the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is changed to a black image 9072, and in the lower center area of the effect display device 905, A flame effect image 9073 as an effect display is displayed, and an effect of superimposing and displaying on the black image 9072 is performed. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 905 by moving the movable member 90321 to the standing position. Is done. The appearing movable member 90321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 72E, when the movable member 90321 appears and moves to the standing position due to the movable body operation effect, the flame of the flame effect image 9073 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 90321 and the flame is increased. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 9073 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed using the flame effect image 9073 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 9073 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the message display 55 in which the big win display result (same design stop) is derived and displayed in the effect design that has been displayed in the small design format, and the message “Congratulations” is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the effect symbol for which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed in the same manner as the battle reach effect. However, unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is set as a black image, and the effect image is superimposed on the black image. Thus, the effect image can be displayed with further emphasis, and an image display having a higher effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. Thereby, the precious feeling (premiere feeling) of the story reach production in which the expectation degree to the big hit is set higher than the battle reach production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the story reach production, when the fluctuation display result becomes the out-of-order display result, the above-mentioned story incomplete production is executed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed in the production design displayed in the small design format. Will return to the original size and position and be displayed.

  The movable member 90321 may be configured such that a disk-shaped portion can be rotated by a driving means such as a motor that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 90120. When the disk-like portion of the movable member 90321 is configured to be capable of rotation control, the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIG. 71 (E) or FIG. 72 (E). When it appears in front of the display area of the device 905, or when it appears, the disk-shaped portion may be controlled to rotate. In that case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 90321, the effect display device 905 displays images for operating the effect images such as the particle effect image 9071 in FIG. 71 (E) and the flame effect image 9073 in FIG. 72 (E). The effect control to be displayed may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect obtained by using the movable member 90321 and the effect image.

  In addition, the movable member 90321 is not limited to a rotating operation, and a part or all of the constituent members perform a deformation operation such as opening / closing or contracting by a driving unit such as a solenoid that is driven and controlled by the CPU 90120 for effect control. In such a configuration, in a specific effect scene, the display is performed on the effect display device 905 in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 905. Effect control for displaying an image for operating the effect image to be performed may be executed.

  Next, a control example of effect effects and movable body effects in specific super reach effects such as battle reach effects and story reach effects will be described using timing charts.

  FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect effects and movable object effects in a specific super reach effect. FIG. 73 (A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 73 (B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73 (A), a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 71 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 71B and 71C, a message image 9053 is displayed and a moving image such as a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. Is done. The timing at which the effect display device 905 changes from the image display of the battle effect to the image display of the victory effect as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) and 71 (E) is the milestone of the first change in the video related to the battle reach effect ( This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change regarding such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. 71 (D) and (E). This is executed in a manner in which a particle effect effect in which an image displaying 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and a movable body operation effect that operates the movable member 90321 are linked.

  The timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the standing position as shown in FIGS. 71E and 71F in the effect display device 905 and changes from the image display of the victory effect to the image display of the reach result effect is battle reach. This is a time when the second change of the video related to the production (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change regarding such a battle reach effect, the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the victory effect image as shown in FIG. 71 (E). An effect display effect such as an image to be displayed is executed in the effect display device 905.

  When the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are finished, the reach result is displayed by executing the reach result effect image display as shown in FIG. 71 (F) on the effect display device 905. Thereafter, when the reach result effect ends, the effect display device 905 executes a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 71 (G), thereby performing a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and also displaying a variable display. finish.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the change in the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the battle reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (B), a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 72 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  When the reach state occurs in the effect display device 905, message images 9054A and 9054B are displayed as shown in FIGS. 72B and 72C, and a moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect is displayed. An image is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 72D and 72E in the effect display device 905, the timing of changing from the image display of the story effect to the image display of the story completion effect is the milestone of the first change in the video related to the story reach effect. This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change relating to such story reach production, a flame effect image is displayed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 72 (E). This is executed in such a manner that a flame effect effect in which an image displaying 9073 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and a movable body operation effect that operates the movable member 90321 are linked.

  The timing at which the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and (F) in the effect display device 905 and changes from the image display of the story completion effect to the image display of the reach result effect is the story. This is the time when the second change in the video related to the reach production will be a turning point (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change relating to such story reach production, a flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 72 (E). Operation effect effects such as images to be performed are executed in the effect display device 905.

  When the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are finished, the reach result is displayed by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. 72 (F) in the effect display device 905. Thereafter, when the reach result effect ends, the effect display device 905 executes a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 72 (G), thereby performing a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and also performing a variable display. finish.

  As described above, in the story reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the story reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  Specifically, in the battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 71 and 73A and the story reach effects shown in FIGS. 72 and 73B, the CPU 90120 for effect control performs the following processing. Is realized.

  When a variation pattern designation command in which a variation pattern of a super-reach type for executing a battle reach effect is designated as the variation pattern designation command is received by the effect control board 9012. In the variable display start setting process (S90171), the CPU 90120 performs image display control of the effect display device 905 that performs battle reach effects and operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73A. Is selected from a plurality of types of presentation control data stored in advance, and is set (stored) in the RAM 90122. The battle reach production partly differs depending on whether the fluctuation display result is a jackpot display result or a disapproval display result. Therefore, a variation pattern designation command or a display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received. When the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the received command content, it recognizes the change display result and selects the effect control data corresponding to the change display result. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts to display the effect symbols in a variable manner, and uses the effect control data set to execute the battle reach effect in the effect processing during variable display (S90172), and the movable object effect process and the effect. By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73A is executed.

  When a variation pattern designating command in which a super reach variation pattern for executing a story reach effect is designated as the variation pattern designating command is received by the effect control board 9012. In the variable display start setting process (S90171), the CPU 90120 performs image display control of an effect display device 905 that performs a story reach effect and operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73B. Is selected from a plurality of types of presentation control data stored in advance, and is set (stored) in the RAM 90122. The story reach production is partially different depending on whether the fluctuation display result is the jackpot display result or the disapproval display result, so a variation pattern designation command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result has been received. When the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the received command content, it recognizes the change display result and selects the effect control data corresponding to the change display result. Then, the CPU 90120 for effect control starts the variable display of effect symbols, and in the variable display effect process (S90172), using the effect control data set for executing the story reach effect, the movable object effect process and the effect are performed. By executing the effect display processing and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73B is executed.

  When the movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 71 and 73A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 72 and 73B. Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image, and an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the effect image Since the effect effect display in a different mode can be displayed, it is possible to enhance the effect that links the operation of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (E) and 73 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is executed is executed. 71D, the effect effect display in a specific manner such as the particle effect image 9071 in FIGS. 71D and 71E can be executed in a superimposed manner on the effect display of a specific type such as the display of the victory effect image. Therefore, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905, and the operation of the movable body by the effect display of the specific type And the effect of displaying the effect of the display means can be further enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 72E and 73B, a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect in which a movable object effect that operates a movable object such as the movable member 90321 is executed is executed. 72D and 72E, a specific effect display such as a flame effect image 9073 shown in FIGS. 72D and 72E is applied to a predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the display display device 905 such as a black image 9072. Since the effect to be displayed in a superimposed manner can be executed, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905. Thus, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  It should be noted that effects such as the aforementioned battle reach effect and story reach effect that link the movable body and effect effect display may be performed in reach effects other than super reach, or in effects other than reach effects. May be.

  In addition, the example in which the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above is executed at the timing that becomes the turning point of the change of the video related to the effect. Not limited to this, it may be executed at a timing other than the timing that becomes a turning point of the change of the video related to the effect, such as the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect execution.

  In addition, as the effect effect display in the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display like the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example. Not limited to this, as the effect display, other types of effect display such as an effect image in the form of light emission may be used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, different types of effect display can be displayed depending on which effect display is performed among the two types of effect display of battle reach effect and story reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display different types of effect display according to which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, different effect display effects are displayed depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of effect displays such as battle reach effects and story reach effects. An example in which the effect effect display mode is changed depending on whether the black image 9072 is displayed or not is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of changing the effect effect display mode, any type of effect display displays a black image, but the effect effect display type such as an effect image may be different. In this case, the effect effect display types may be different as long as any of the effect effect display components such as the shape, color, display range, and luminance of the effect effect display image is different.

  In addition, as the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the effect effect display images as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 are displayed first. Not only the effect of moving the movable body later, but also the effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing, and the image of the effect effect display after operating the movable body first An effect of displaying may be used.

  Moreover, as an effect using the black image 9072 as in the story reach effect described above, an example in which the black image 9072 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 905 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, control may be performed to display the black image 9072 in a part of the display area in the effect display device 905 such as an area for displaying the effect image.

  In addition, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and an effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of effect display with different effects display conditions. When performing an effect, an effect may be executed in which an effect image display as a different type of effect display is displayed in association with the operation of the movable body, depending on the state of the effect display for operating the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effects display situation. (A) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body before entering the reach state during the variation display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying an effect image corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating the movable body at the time of the development of the production during the execution of the super-reach of the development production format in which the production content develops. (F) Corresponding to operating a movable body when a lottery effect (for example, an effect of drawing a lottery whether to be a promising big hit or a non-probable big hit) after notifying that a big hit display result has been obtained To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the production of the big hit gaming state. (H) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demonstration display that is executed when no game is being played. It should be noted that at least two of the effect image displays executed in a plurality of types of effect display situations as described above may be different.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) The gaming machine according to the above embodiment is
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Control means (for example, a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), a solenoid, a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, a fourth lamp unit 90204, a fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP90123A, dedicated IC, etc.)
Output means for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B),
The output means receives a control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 49), and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T in FIG. 49) has elapsed (FIG. 49: timeout). Function)
When the control means outputs a control signal and continuously drives the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). The control signal is output until the predetermined period T elapses.

  According to the above configuration, the malfunction of the electronic component can be avoided, so that the electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(2) In gaming machines,
The output means includes conversion means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B) that converts a serial signal type control signal output from the control means into a parallel signal type drive signal.

According to the above configuration, the number of communication wires between the control unit and the output unit can be reduced.
(3) In gaming machines,
It further comprises setting means for setting the stop means to be valid or invalid (a predetermined terminal for setting the time-out function of each conversion IC to be valid or invalid, an effect control board 9012, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, the function of the stopping unit can be set to be valid or invalid depending on the application, and thus it is possible to reduce costs by sharing parts.

(4) In gaming machines,
A first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012) provided with the control means;
A second substrate (for example, the first lamp substrate 90210) provided with the output means,
The first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected via a wiring member (flexible, harness, etc.).

  According to the said structure, since it has arrange | positioned on another board | substrate, it can suppress that the control abnormality which may generate | occur | produce by the malfunction (disconnection, short circuit, etc.) of wiring generate | occur | produces.

(5) In gaming machines,
The output means controls the driving of the electronic component by outputting a PWM signal as a driving signal (for example, the driving signal is PWM-controlled by the number of Low signals, and the light emission luminance of each LED is light emission by PWM control) The gradation is controlled according to the period.)

According to the above configuration, power efficiency can be increased by PWM control.
(6) In gaming machines,
The output means includes
The output state when the input control signal is output to other output means includes a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state with a normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51A), The output state can be set to any one of a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51B) in which the waveform rises in a modest change than the first output state,
When the other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means, the second output state is set (for example, connected in the substrate like the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B). The conversion IC 9092B is set to output a low slew rate waveform).

  According to the above configuration, since the output state when outputting within the same substrate is set to the second output state, the emission of noise to the outside of the substrate can be suppressed.

(7) In gaming machines,
The output means includes
The output state when the input control signal is output to other output means includes a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state with a normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51A), The output state can be set to any one of a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 51B) in which the waveform rises in a modest change than the first output state,
When the other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via the wiring member, the first output state is set (for example, conversion) When the IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are connected outside the substrate, the conversion IC 9094B is set to output a normal slew rate waveform).

  According to the above configuration, since the output state when outputting to another board connected via the wiring member is set to the first output state, it is possible to suppress the influence of external noise on the control signal.

(8) In gaming machines,
It further includes a movable member (for example, a production unit 90300) that performs an operation,
The output means outputs a specific signal by a parallel communication system from specific signal output units (for example, terminals Q0 to 23 corresponding to groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 54) grouped into a plurality of different groups,
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, the periods of the PWM clock signals of groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 54 are shifted by 1 MHz).
The driving means for operating the movable member (for example, the motor of the driving mechanism 90201) is the specific signal output unit (for example, terminals of the group belonging to the same period (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) in the same group of the output means). ) Is driven on the basis of a specific signal output from).

  According to the above configuration, noise emission to the outside of the substrate can be suppressed by shifting the output period of the specific signal by the parallel communication method.

(9) In gaming machines,
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous for the player by performing a variable display.
Reservation storage means for storing the variable display that has not yet been started as the storage for holding (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B, the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A, the second Receiving command buffer 194B at the time of starting winning prize),
On-hold display means (for example, an effect display device 905, a RAM 90102, a first on-hold display area 905D, a second on-hold display area 905U, etc.) capable of displaying on-hold storage stored in the on-hold storage means as on-hold display (for example, on-hold display). )When,
A variation correspondence display means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120, S90532 in FIG. 62, etc.) capable of performing a variation correspondence display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display,
A hold display mode change (for example, a change during hold display in FIG. 67) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and a mode of the display corresponding to the change during the execution of the change display A change corresponding to a change in display mode (for example, a change during active display in FIG. 68) is changed in plural during a hold display period and a variable display period corresponding to a target hold storage. Display mode changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120, S90532 in FIG. 62, icon effect setting processing in FIG. 69, S90172 in FIG. 60, etc.) that can be executed at any one of the timings Prepared,
The display mode changing means includes a first specific display (for example, a character icon display in FIG. 65 (A)) and a second specific display (character in FIG. 65 (B)) whose display type to be changed is different from the normal display. The selection ratio of the timing at which the display mode change is executed differs depending on whether it is an icon display (as shown in FIGS. 63B and 63C), the character icon display changes during the hold display. The execution ratio is high, and the character icon display has a high change effect execution ratio during active display, and the ratio at which the display mode actually changes during execution of the change effect as shown in FIGS. It is the same between the display and the active display, so depending on whether it is a character icon display or a character icon display, the icons are displayed in the hold display and the active display. Aspects different frequency of changes, the rate of selecting or changing a display form in either an in active display and pending displays different.).

  According to the above configuration, with respect to the hold display mode change and the change correspondence display mode change, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change. Interest can be improved.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various configurations including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 905 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, with respect to either the hold display displayed in the first hold display area 905D or the second hold display area 905U, The hold change effect may be executed, and when there is a hold display displayed in a special manner in one of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, the first hold display area A hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed on either 905D, the hold display displayed in the second hold display area 905U, or the active display.

  (3) Either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the active display mode. In this case, for example, the first reserved display area 905D, the second reserved display area 905U, the first reserved change area 905D, and the second reserved display area 905U A color with a high expectation level of jackpot compared to the color of the hold display displayed in the hold display displayed in the hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U (for example, in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) The color in the display mode of the active display may be changed so that the display mode is a color such as yellow or red.

  (4) For example, the ratio of “executed” and “not executed” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4′-X” in the setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution determination table in FIG. , “Executed” and “executed” as 45% (the sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect 20%) A ratio may be set for each of “No”, and the ratio of “Execution” and “No Execution” is 0% to 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1′-X” in FIG. The ratio according to this embodiment may be set such that one of a plurality is set as 0%.

  (5) In the probability change control, a gaming machine may be provided in which a specific area is provided in advance in the special winning opening, and the gaming ball is controlled to be in a certain probability state based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random value MR2 ′ for determining the big hit type, a game ball enters a specific area in the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. It may be a gaming machine that controls to a game state that is easy to play, and controls to a probability change state based on the fact that a game ball has passed through this specific area.

  (6) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using the number which is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine (enclosed gaming machine) in which a player plays a game by using a gaming score or a gaming score given by winning a game to hit a gaming ball enclosed in the gaming machine. Can be applied.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within a range of 0% to 100% Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation state control example is shown in which the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, and then is controlled unconditionally to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is finished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 907. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the effect control CPU 90120 (and the VDP 90123A) outputs the control signal has been described, but the configuration is not limited thereto. For example, apart from the effect control CPU 90120 (and VDP90123A), a dedicated IC having a control signal output function as described above may be provided in the effect control board 9012 and output by the dedicated IC. .

  (10) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 5 Image display apparatus 11 Main board 12 Production control board 100 Microcomputer 103 for game control CPU
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display Control Unit 901 Pachinko Machine 90151A First Special Figure Reservation Storage Unit 90151B Second Special Figure Retention Storage Unit 90194A First Start Prize Received Command Buffer 90194B Second Start Prize Received Command Buffer 905 Production Display Device 90102 RAM
905D first hold display area 905U second hold display area 90120 CPU for effect control
AHA active display area

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Variable display means for variably displaying the identification information in a predetermined direction;
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect;
Control means for controlling a plurality of electronic components;
Based on the input of the control signal outputted from the control unit, and an output means for outputting a driving signal for driving the electronic component,
The output means includes stop means for stopping output of the drive signal after a predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the input of the control signal,
The stopping means can be set to valid or invalid,
In the case where the stop means is valid and outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses. To output the control signal again ,
The predetermined notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to view at the start of the variable display,
The identification information can start variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
A specific effect can be executed in a display area common to the predetermined notice effect,
The specific effect can be executed at a first timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed. Adjusting means capable of adjusting the effect of the effect according to the adjusting operation by the player;
Adjustment image display means for displaying an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means for a predetermined period;
When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment image not visible or difficult to view during the period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1.